Admin
Admin
Release 14
Administration
07-601585
July 2007
Contents
Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Intended users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
21
22
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administration documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Center documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avaya CMS upgrade documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base load upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Platform upgrades and data migration . . . . . . . . . . .
Avaya Call Management System Upgrade Express (CUE)
Documentation Web sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
23
23
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
26
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
27
27
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27
28
28
28
28
29
31
31
32
ACD Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Avaya CMS tracks ACD data . . . . .
How CMS tracks a call . . . . . . . . . .
Events that start or stop data collection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33
33
33
34
37
37
General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
Contents
Scripting tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
40
41
43
44
46
47
49
50
50
Dictionary rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
52
ACD Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listing all ACD Groups . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the contents of an ACD Group
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
54
54
55
55
56
ACDs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . .
Adding an ACD name . .
Modifying an ACD name.
Deleting an ACD Name .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57
58
58
59
60
Agent groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding an agent group . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listing agents in an agent group . . . . . . . . .
Copying an existing agent group to a new name
Adding agents to an existing agent group . . . .
Deleting agents in an existing agent group . . .
Deleting an agent group. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
61
62
63
64
66
67
69
70
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
71
71
72
74
Announcement names . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . .
Adding an announcement name
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
75
76
76
77
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
78
79
80
81
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
82
82
83
83
84
85
87
88
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . .
Viewing a calculation . . . . . .
Listing all calculations . . . . .
Adding a calculation. . . . . . .
Modifying a custom calculation
Deleting a custom calculation .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
89
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
96
97
97
98
99
100
101
102
Constants. . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . .
Adding a constant . .
Viewing a constant .
Listing all constants .
Modifying a constant
Deleting a constant .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
103
103
104
105
106
107
108
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
109
109
109
110
111
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
Contents
112
113
114
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
115
115
115
116
Location IDs . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . .
Adding a location ID . .
Viewing a location ID .
Listing all location IDs.
Modifying a location ID
Deleting a Location ID .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
117
117
118
119
120
121
122
Login ID names . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . .
Adding a name to a login ID.
Viewing a login ID name. . .
Listing all login ID names . .
Modifying a login ID name .
Deleting a login ID name . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
123
123
124
124
125
126
127
128
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
129
130
130
130
131
132
134
135
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136
137
137
137
138
140
Split/Skill names . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . .
Adding a split/skill name
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
141
142
142
143
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
144
145
146
147
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
148
148
149
150
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
151
151
151
152
153
154
155
156
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
157
157
158
159
VDN names . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . .
Adding a VDN name . .
Viewing a VDN name .
Listing all VDN names .
Modifying a VDN name
Deleting a VDN name .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
160
161
161
162
163
164
165
166
Vector names. . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . .
Adding a vector name . .
Viewing a vector name .
Listing all vector names .
Modifying a vector name
Deleting a vector name .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
167
167
168
168
169
170
171
172
Dictionary reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Dictionary reports . . . . . . . .
Running an agent group members report
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
173
173
174
176
Administration
July 2007
Contents
.
.
.
.
179
180
180
181
Choosing a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
Generating a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
Printing a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
185
185
Restarting a report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
187
187
187
188
Creating scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the script options . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an interactive report script . . . . . . .
Creating an automatic report script . . . . . . .
Creating a script to export report data . . . . . .
Creating a script to export report data as HTML
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
188
189
189
191
192
193
194
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
195
195
196
197
199
200
201
201
204
206
208
215
219
222
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
179
July 2007
Contents
224
227
227
ACD Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Group capabilities . . . . . . . . .
ACD Groups feature interfaces . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding an ACD Group. . . . . . . . . .
Listing all ACD Groups . . . . . . . . .
Adding an ACD to an ACD Group . . .
Viewing the contents of an ACD Group
Deleting an ACD from an ACD Group .
Modifying an ACD Group . . . . . . . .
Deleting an ACD Group . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
227
228
229
230
230
230
231
233
234
236
238
240
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
241
241
242
242
244
245
246
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
247
247
248
248
249
251
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
252
252
253
253
255
256
258
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
259
260
260
260
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
Contents
262
263
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
264
265
265
265
VDN-to-vector assignments. . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing all VDN-to-vector assignments
Listing VDNs associated with a vector .
Modifying VDN-to-vector assignments .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
266
267
267
267
268
269
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
271
271
272
272
274
275
277
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
278
279
279
279
283
About exceptions . . . .
Types of Exceptions .
Notification . . . . . .
Exception capacities
10
.
.
.
.
284
284
285
286
286
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287
Exception notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing exception notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
288
Agent exceptions . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . .
Adding agent exceptions . .
Modifying agent exceptions.
Deleting agent exceptions .
Agent exception definitions .
289
289
290
290
292
294
297
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
Contents
299
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
302
303
303
303
306
308
310
311
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
314
315
315
315
317
319
321
322
VDN exceptions . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . .
Adding VDN exceptions . .
Modifying VDN exceptions
Deleting VDN exceptions .
VDN exception definitions
VDN exceptions report . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
324
325
326
326
328
330
332
333
Vector exceptions . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . .
Adding vector exceptions . .
Modifying vector exceptions
Deleting vector exceptions .
Vector exception definitions
Vector exceptions report . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
336
337
337
337
339
341
342
343
346
346
347
349
349
349
351
Administration
July 2007
11
Contents
352
352
355
355
356
User data . . . . . . . . .
Adding a CMS user .
Viewing CMS users .
Modifying CMS users
Deleting CMS users .
12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
356
357
360
362
364
ACD access . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . .
Permissions . . . . . .
Adding ACD access . .
Viewing ACD access. .
Listing all ACD access
Modifying ACD access
Deleting ACD access .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
367
367
368
368
369
371
372
374
Feature access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Feature Access user permissions .
Listing all Feature Access user permissions
Modifying Feature Access user permissions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
376
376
377
377
378
379
381
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
382
383
383
383
383
385
386
Split/Skill access. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding split/skill user permissions .
Viewing split/skill user permissions .
Listing all split/skill user permissions
Modifying split/skill user permissions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
388
389
389
389
391
393
394
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
Contents
396
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
398
398
399
399
401
403
404
406
Vector access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding vector user permissions . .
Viewing vector user permissions. .
Listing all vector user permissions.
Modifying vector user permissions
Deleting vector user permissions .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
408
408
409
409
411
413
414
416
VDN access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding VDN user permissions . .
Viewing VDN user permissions . .
Listing all VDN user permissions .
Modifying VDN user permissions.
Deleting VDN user permissions .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
418
418
419
419
421
423
424
426
429
429
CMS state. . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . .
Changing the CMS state. .
Changing the master ACD
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
429
430
430
431
432
Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the data collection state .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
433
433
434
434
436
436
437
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
13
Contents
14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
444
445
445
446
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
447
448
448
448
450
451
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
452
453
454
454
456
458
459
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
460
460
460
461
Pseudo-ACDs . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . .
Creating a pseudo-ACD . .
Viewing pseudo-ACDs. . .
Deleting a pseudo-ACD . .
Loading pseudo-ACD data
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
464
464
466
466
467
468
470
Storage intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing storage interval settings . . .
Changing the intrahour interval . . .
Changing switch time zone . . . . . .
Modifying data summarizing settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
472
473
473
473
474
476
479
Switch setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
482
482
482
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
437
439
July 2007
Contents
483
484
487
487
ACD status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing ACD status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listing ACD status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the ACD Status window - with EAS . .
Description of the ACD Status window - without EAS
Requesting ACD translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
488
488
488
489
492
493
494
495
Archiving status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the archiving status of a single ACD . . . . .
Viewing the archiving status of all ACDs . . . . . . .
Description of the Archiving Status - List All window
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
495
495
496
496
498
499
Backup/restore devices . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing a backup/restore device . .
Listing all backup/restore devices .
Adding a backup/restore device . .
Modifying a backup/restore device .
Deleting a backup/restore device. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
500
501
501
503
504
506
507
Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMSADM backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape drives and cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Things to consider when backing up or restoring data . .
Factors that impact backup and restore times . . . .
Reducing tape backup and restore times . . . . . . .
Alternate methods for backing up and restoring data
Performing a CMSADM backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a maintenance backup . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the Backup Data window . . . . . . . . . .
The Backup Data window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data to back up descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
508
509
509
510
510
510
511
512
512
514
517
517
517
518
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
15
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
521
521
522
522
524
526
Connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the connection status of an ACD . . .
Listing the connection status of all ACDs . . .
Description of the Connection Status window
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
527
527
528
529
531
Administering a printer . . .
Before you begin. . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . .
Adding a new printer . .
Listing all printers . . . .
Modifying printer options
Deleting a printer . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
532
533
533
534
535
537
538
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
539
540
540
542
542
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
566
567
567
568
570
571
571
Logging in to CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging in to CMS from the remote console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging in to CMS from the server console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
571
571
572
Administering passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a user's password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
574
574
575
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
519
519
520
July 2007
Contents
576
576
579
Timetables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and scheduling a timetable .
Adding tasks to a timetable . . . . . .
Listing all timetables . . . . . . . . .
Copying a timetable . . . . . . . . . .
Copying timetable tasks. . . . . . . .
Modifying timetable tasks . . . . . . .
Editing timetables globally . . . . . .
Globally editing tasks in a timetable .
Deleting tasks from a timetable. . . .
Deleting a timetable . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
579
580
581
581
585
587
588
589
591
593
595
598
600
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . .
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a shortcut . . . . . . . .
Adding tasks to a shortcut . . . .
Running a shortcut . . . . . . . .
Modifying a shortcut description .
Copying a shortcut . . . . . . . .
Copying shortcut tasks . . . . . .
Modifying shortcut tasks . . . . .
Deleting shortcut tasks . . . . . .
Deleting a shortcut . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
602
602
603
603
605
606
607
608
609
611
612
613
Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
615
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
627
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
17
Contents
18
Administration
July 2007
Preface
Avaya Call Management System (CMS) is an application for businesses and organizations that
use Avaya communication servers to process large volumes of telephone calls using the
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature. Avaya CMS supports solutions for routing and agent
selection, multi-site contact centers, remote agents, reporting, interfaces to other systems,
workforce management, desktop applications, system recovery, and quality monitoring.
Avaya CMS is part of the Operational Effectiveness solution of the Avaya Customer Interaction
Suite.
This section includes the following topics:
Purpose on page 19
Overview on page 20
Availability on page 22
Support on page 26
Purpose
The purpose of this document is to provide instructions on administering a contact center
through Avaya CMS Supervisor.
This information product specifically addresses the functionality of CMS.
Intended users
This document is written for:
Avaya Call Management System (CMS) administrators who have access to all parts of
CMS
Administration
July 2007
19
Preface
Overview
This document includes the following topics:
20
Administration
July 2007
CAUTION:
Caution statements call attention to situations that can result in harm to software,
loss of data, or an interruption in service.
WARNING:
Warning statements call attention to situations that can result in harm to hardware
or equipment.
DANGER:
Danger statements call attention to situations that can result in harm to personnel.
SECURITY ALERT:
Security alert statements call attention to situations that can increase the potential
for unauthorized use of a telecommunications system.
CAUTION:
WARNING:
DANGER:
SECURITY ALERT:
Note:
Note:
In some instances, your communication server and its associated software may
be referred to as "switch". Unless otherwise noted, the term, Communication
Manager, includes earlier Avaya communication servers, such as MultiVantage
and DEFINITY.
Administration
July 2007
21
Preface
Availability
Copies of this document are available from one or both of the following sources:
Note:
Although there is no charge to download documents through the Avaya Web site,
documents ordered from the Avaya Publications Center must be purchased.
Note:
22
Administration
July 2007
Related documentation
Related documentation
You might find the following Avaya CMS documentation useful. This section includes the
following topics:
Change description
For information about recent changes made in Avaya CMS, see:
Administration documents
For more information about Avaya CMS administration, see:
Avaya Call Management System (CMS) Release 14 Database Items and Calculations,
07-601591
Avaya Call Management System (CMS) Supervisor Release 14 Installation and Getting
Started, 07-601587
Administration
July 2007
23
Preface
Software documents
For more information about Avaya CMS software, see:
Avaya Call Management System Release 14 LAN Backup User Guide, 07-601589
Avaya Call Management System Release 14 External Call History Interface, 07-601586
Hardware documents
For more information about Avaya CMS hardware, see:
Avaya Call Management System Sun Netra 210 Computer Hardware Installation,
Maintenance, and Troubleshooting, 07-600963
Avaya Call Management System Sun Fire V880/V890 Computer Hardware Installation,
Maintenance, and Troubleshooting, 07-600965
Avaya Call Management System Sun Blade 100/150 Workstation Hardware Installation,
Maintenance, and Troubleshooting, 07-600964
24
Administration
July 2007
Related documentation
Avaya Call Management System Release 14 Platform Upgrade and Data Migration,
07-601581
Avaya Call Management System Release 14 CMS Upgrade Express (CUE) Customer
Requirements, 700419930
Administration
July 2007
25
Preface
Support
Contacting Avaya technical support
Avaya provides support telephone numbers for you to report problems or ask questions about
your product.
For United States support:
1- 800- 242-2121
For international support:
See the 1-800 Support Directory listings on the Avaya Web site.
26
Administration
July 2007
Chapter 1: Introduction
This section provides introductory information on Avaya CMS Supervisor and complementary
products. Basic information regarding the interfaces and usage of Supervisor can be found in
the Avaya CMS Supervisor Installation and Getting Started document.
This section contains the following topics:
Operating system
Avaya CMS resides on the Sun Microsystems, Inc. Solaris operating system and uses several
Solaris system utilities to communicate with terminals and printers, to log errors, and to execute
processes. CMS utilizes the Informix Software, Inc. INFORMIX database management system,
which provides an interface to the CMS historical database.
Administration
July 2007
27
Chapter 1: Introduction
Physically - How the CMS system mechanically stores the data on the disk drive
Real-time databases
Real-time databases include tables for the current intrahour interval data and the previous
intrahour interval data. The storage interval can be 15, 30, or 60 minutes.
Historical databases
Historical databases include tables for the intrahour, daily, weekly, and monthly data. The
following table shows all of the historical database tables and the maximum amount of time data
can be stored in a particular table:
Note:
62 days
Note:
You can use historical data to predict future call traffic and future agent and trunk
requirements. For more information see Avaya CMS Forecast User Guide.
Data summarizing
When CMS collects data from the ACD, the data is stored in the real-time database for the
current interval. At the end of the current interval, the following events occur:
28
Administration
July 2007
The data that was in current interval database table is archived to the previous interval
database table.
The data that was in previous interval database table is archived in the historical database
as intrahour historical data.
The data remains in the historical database as intrahour historical data for a maximum of 62
days. At your designated data summarizing time, the intrahour historical data is summarized
into daily historical data.
The daily historical data is summarized on a weekly and monthly basis. At the end of your
designated week, the daily historical data is summarized into weekly historical data. On the first
day of a new month, the daily historical data is summarized into monthly historical data for the
previous month.
For more information, see CMS data storage on page 29.
Administration
July 2007
29
Chapter 1: Introduction
Data
CMS processor
Real-time database
Current interval data
Agent
(cagent)
Split
(csplit)
Trunk
(ctrunk)
Trunk
Vector
group
(cvector)
(ctkgrp)
VDN
(cvdn)
Call
work
codes
(ccwc)
The previous
interval data is
archived at the
end of the interval
to the intrahour
historical data
Split
(psplit)
Trunk
(ptrunk)
VDN
(pvdn)
Call
work
codes
(pcwc)
Historical database
Intrahour historical data
Agent
(hagent)
Split
(hsplit)
Intrahour data is
summarized into
daily data.
Daily data is
summarized into
weekly data and
monthly data
Trunk
Vector
group
(pvector)
(ptkgrp)
The current
interval data is
archived at the
end of the interval
to the previous
interval data
VDN
(hvdn)
Call
work
codes
(hcwc)
VDN
(dvdn)
Call
work
codes
(dcwc)
Trunk
Trunk
Vector
VDN
(wtrunk) group
(wvector) (wvdn)
(wtkgrp)
Call
work
codes
(wcwc)
Trunk
(htrunk)
Trunk
Vector
group
(hvector)
(htkgrp)
Split
(dsplit)
Trunk
(dtrunk)
Trunk
Vector
group
(dvector)
(dtkgrp)
Agent
Split
(wagent) (wsplit)
30
Administration
Trunk
Agent
Trunk
Split
Vector
VDN
(magent) (msplit) (mtrunk) group
(mvector) (mvdn)
(mtkgrp)
Call
work
codes
(mcwc)
July 2007
The dbspace acd1 contains the historical database table for ACD 1
The dbspace acd2 contains the historical database table for ACD 2
Logical
Physical
Disk 1
Disk 2
Historical
database
tables
agent
split
trunk
tkgrp
vector
vdn
cwc
Disk 3
dbspace acd1
dbspace acd1
dbspace acd1
dbspace acd2
dbspace acd2
Dbspace
A dbspace is a logical unit that consists of one or more chunks. Dbspaces can exist across
multiple disks. A CMS system contains the following dbspaces:
rootdbs
physdbs
logdbs
dbtemp
aasdbs
cmsdbs
freedbs
Administration
July 2007
31
Chapter 1: Introduction
!
Important:
Important:
Do not attempt to alter rootdbs, physdbs, logdbs, dbtemp, aasdbs, or cmsdbs.
Contact CMS services if you think you have a problem with any of these
dbspaces.
In the following example, the dbspace acd1 exists across multiple disks.
acd1
rootdbs through
freedbs
acd1
acd1
Individual
dbspaces
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
Chunks
A chunk is a unit of physical disk space used to store database data that is managed by IDS.
Each chunk contains 256 MB of disk space. In the following example, the dbspace acd1
contains multiple chunks.
rootdbs through
freedbs
Chunk
acd1
Chunk
Chunk
acd1
Chunk
acd1
Chunk
Chunk
Chunk
Chunk
Disk 1
32
Administration
Disk 2
Disk 3
July 2007
ACD Administration
ACD Administration
CMS provides an administrative interface to the communication server. From the ACD interface,
you can view or change parameters on the communication server related to ACDs, Call
Vectoring, and Expert Agent Selection (EAS). An administrator can also run reports that
describe your contact center configuration.
For example, an administrator can:
Administration
July 2007
33
Chapter 1: Introduction
Note:
With vectoring, the Stop command stops the processing of vector commands.
Note:
Call process
Call
seizes
trunk
Call enters
VDN/vector
Call
queues to
split/skill
Vector
processing
ends
Call rings
agent
Agent
answers
call
Trunk
drops
call
Agent
ends ACW
Trunk/trunk group
table
Vector table
VDN table
Split/Skill table
Agent table
CWC table
The Agent table starts collecting data on non-ACD calls when the agent answers or
completes dialing.
The Vector table stops collecting data for the current vector when the call is:
- Sent to an ACD agent
- Connected to a station or trunk
- Routed to a VDN or vector
- Abandoned by the caller
Note:
Time in the vector stops but the vector tracks the call disposition to determine if
the call was answered or abandoned.
Note:
The VDN table stops collecting data for the current VDN when:
- The ACW for an ACD call ends
- The call is routed to a trunk or VDN
34
Administration
July 2007
ACD Administration
Administration
July 2007
35
Chapter 1: Introduction
36
Administration
July 2007
Scripting defaults
Administration
July 2007
37
General tab
Use the General tab to set your first calendar day, default ACD, and other interface usage
options.
38
First Day of Week - This option affects only how the calendar is displayed. For example, if
you browse for a date, the calendar starts the week based on the day that you choose. It
does not change the Start of Week day for weekly data collection which is set through the
System Setup - Storage Intervals window.
Default ACD - Select the ACD that will be used as the default ACD for operations and
reports windows. Note that an ACD Group can also be set as the default.
Synchronize PC and CMS Time at Login - Select this check box to change the internal
clock of the PC to match the current time on the CMS server. This option does not affect
the time on the CMS server.
Use Sound - Select this check box to receive an audible alert when the Exceptions
Indicator box is updated. The Exceptions Indicator box is located on the Controller
status bar. The sound that you hear is the sound that you chose for the exclamation event
in Windows. Note that Threshold Highlighting does not use sound. It uses color only as an
indicator of a threshold being met.
Use Tooltips - Select this check box to make tooltips visible for the controls in the
Supervisor interface. For example, when you are working in the Supervisor Controller
window, you can place your mouse cursor over a toolbar button and the system displays a
yellow box that provides a brief description of that button.
Use Taskbar Icon - Select this check box to have Supervisor place an icon in the system
tray.
Administration
July 2007
Scripting tab
Window Menu Sort Order - Use this option group to determine how items that are
displayed in the menu for system tray icon are sorted:
- Start Order - Select this option to display the items in the system tray icon menu
where the last item used appears at the top of the menu.
- Alphabetical - Select this option to display the items in the system tray icon menu in
alphabetical order.
Scripting tab
Use the Scripting tab to set the user ID used to run scripts, adjust the logging level, and set the
file used for logging.
Set User Button - Select this button to open the Save as Script - User Information
dialog box.
Logging Level - This option group allows the following logging levels in configuring the
amount of information that is recorded during the use of scripting:
- Minimum - The only activities that will be logged are errors and messages from
Supervisor that would have been displayed to the window as if the user performed the
scripted activity manually.
- Normal - All of the above activities are logged plus the start and stop time of each task
of the script. The script name is also included.
Administration
July 2007
39
- Maximum - All of the above activities are logged plus additional information that may
be useful for debugging a script. Any message that displays as the script runs is
logged.
Log File Path - Enter the path and filename of the logfile in this field. You may also use the
Browse button to the right of this field to select an existing file on the PC.
Log File Size - This field determines how large the script log file can get before it is begins
replacing the oldest data. The field defaults to a value of 200KB.
View Log Button - Select this button to view the script log file.
Scheme - This drop-down list box contains all of the existing color schemes available.
Save As - Selecting this button saves any changes made in the color bar window as a new
scheme. See Creating a new report color scheme on page 41 for instructions on creating
report color schemes.
Color window - This displays of 16 bars allows you to change the color and pattern of
each bar by performing a right-click on that bar.
Background - There are two choices for the background color of reports:
- White - Select this option to display a white background for all reports.
40
Administration
July 2007
- Automatic - Select this option to have the background of all reports use the color
scheme configured through Windows.
Administration
July 2007
41
6. If you want to modify the color, select the Change Color button and select the color
through the Color dialog that is displayed.
7. If you want to modify the pattern, select the Change Pattern button and select the pattern
from the resulting list.
8. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 until you have updated all of the color bars that you want to
modify.
42
Administration
July 2007
9. When you are done modifying color bars, select the Save As button.
Supervisor displays the Save Scheme As window.
Note:
Note:
If you do not save the new color scheme using the Save As button, the changes
that you have made will overwrite the default color scheme that you modified.
10. Enter a name for this new color scheme in the text box.
11. Select OK to save this scheme.
To view the changes that you made to a color scheme at any point in the modification,
select the Apply button. The current color scheme is then applied to any reports that are
running.
Administration
July 2007
43
Scheme - This drop-down list box contains all of the existing color schemes available.
Save As - Selecting this button saves any changes made in the color bar window as a new
scheme. See Creating a new threshold color scheme on page 44 for instructions on
creating new color schemes.
View/set colors for report threshold indicators - This list box displays the states used
for exception thresholds. A graphical representation of the selected state is displayed in
the area to the right.
Color - Use the button to the right of this field to change the color for the selected
exception threshold state.
Pattern - Use the button to the right of this field to change the graphical pattern applied for
the selected exception threshold state.
44
Administration
July 2007
3. From the Scheme drop-down list, select the color scheme you want to use as a basis for
the new color scheme.
Supervisor displays the view of the scheme.
4. In the View/set colors for report threshold indicators list, select the item you want to
change.
Supervisor displays the current setting for the selected item in the area to the right of the
list box. The Color: and Pattern:/Background: fields display the respective settings for
the current item.
5. If you want to change the color of the selected item, select the Change Color button at the
right of the Color: field.
Supervisor displays the standard Color window from Windows allowing you to select the
new color.
Administration
July 2007
45
6. If you want to change the pattern/background color for the selected item, select the button
at the right of the Pattern:/Background: field.
Depending on the item selected, Supervisor will display either the pattern list or the Color
window which allows you to select a new pattern or background color.
7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 until you have updated all of the threshold element colors that
you want to modify.
8. When you are done modifying the threshold element colors, select the Save As button.
Supervisor displays the Save Scheme As window:
9. In the text box, enter a name for this new threshold color scheme you have just created.
10. Select the OK button to save this new color scheme.
To view the changes that you made to a color scheme at any point in the modification,
select the Apply button. The current color scheme is then applied to any reports that are
running.
46
Administration
July 2007
Choose or create a name format using {name} for entity name (as entered in the Dictionary),
{entity} for entity type, and {number} for entity number. These formats determine how items are
displayed in reports. For example, if you select the name format of {entity}{number}, all of the
entities that can be named in the Dictionary are displayed as the entity type and number instead
of the name defined in the Dictionary. If you selected {name} as the name format, the names
that are assigned to the entities in the Dictionary are displayed.
Manually enter the format that you want using the three possible types: {name},
{entity}, and/or {number}. It is not necessary to use a separator character between
formats unless you want the separator to appear in the report.
For example, if you want to display agent names and extension numbers on reports,
enter {name} {number} in the Format box.
If you entered a nonstandard name format, it is not saved in the Format list.
3. Select OK to save your changes.
Administration
July 2007
47
48
Administration
July 2007
ACDs on page 57
Calculations on page 89
Administration
July 2007
49
Login IDs
Splits/skills
ACDs
Trunk groups
VDNs
Vectors
The Dictionary also allows users to work with items in the database such as:
The names assigned through the Dictionary appear on reports to help users understand them
better. The Dictionary also makes it possible for users to create agent groups, change agent
splits/skills, and change trunk string values for reporting purposes. The Dictionary also provides
a global search function to find any item within it.
50
Administration
July 2007
Dictionary rules
Dictionary rules
The following rules apply to the names assigned in the Dictionary:
Names must be unique within each section of the Dictionary for an ACD.
For example, you can name trunk group 1 as sales, and split/skill 1 as sales, but you
cannot name split/skill 1 as sales and split/skill 2 as sales on the same ACD.
Administration
July 2007
51
ACD names
Database items
Calculations
Agent names
Permissions
To do a global search in the dictionary, you need write permissions for the Dictionary
subsystem.
Steps
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
52
Administration
July 2007
Note:
Note:
Remember the following before entering search criteria:
- You can search on any pattern
- You can include an asterisk (*) or question mark (?) in your pattern
- The search is case sensitive
3. In the Search for: field, enter the item name or pattern.
4. From the Actions menu, select Run.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Global Search Results window.
Field
Contents
Value matched
Field matched
In submenu
Name
Administration
July 2007
53
ACD Groups
This section provides information for viewing ACD Groups in the Dictionary. ACD Groups and
the corresponding members can only be viewed through the Dictionary Operations window.
Administration of ACD Groups is done through the Call Center Administration subsystem.
The capability of viewing ACD Groups through the Dictionary subsystem allows those
individuals who only run reports in the contact center to view which ACDs are defined within
each ACD Group. This capability can assist these individuals in determining which ACD Groups
should be used when running reports.
Note:
ACD Groups cannot be selected to display information through standard CMS
reports. To run reports for ACD Groups, you will need to create custom reports
through the CMS ASCII interface or have them created for you by contacting the
Avaya Professional Services Organization.
Note:
Permissions on page 55
Related topic
For more information on ACD Groups and their usage, see ACD Groups on page 227.
54
If you add an ACD Group, you will need to log out of Supervisor and log back in to see this
group as a choice in the appropriate dialogs.
Overlapping ACD Groups (groups having common member ACDs), could result in
synonym conflict within the members of an ACD Group if poorly administered. Because of
this capability, entity IDs in overlapping ACD Groups must be mutually exclusive.
Entity synonyms must be unique for an ACD Group and across all of the ACDs that are
members of the ACD Group.
User permissions are administered separately for an ACD Group and its member ACDs.
Administration
July 2007
ACD Groups
CMS real-time custom reports are only displayed if data collection is enabled and the ACD
link status is 'up' for at least one member ACD in the specified ACD Group. An error
message will be displayed if these conditions are not met.
Custom reports that are created with the Single ACD Only option enabled cannot be run
for an ACD Group and vice versa.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view ACD Group names, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem and
the ACD Group.
Administration
July 2007
55
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary ACD Groups window.
56
Administration
July 2007
ACDs
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary ACD Groups window.
4. In the ACD Group Name: field, enter the name of the ACD Group that you want to view.
5. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
Supervisor retrieves the information for the specified ACD Group, if valid.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Get contents.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary ACD Groups Get contents window which lists all
ACDs assigned to this ACD Group.
ACDs
This section provides information on administering ACD names in the Dictionary. The
Dictionary Operations window is used to assign names to real and pseudo ACDs. Generated
reports will contain the ACDs names, rather than the assigned ACD numbers.
You can add, delete, or change an ACD name regardless of the ACD that you are currently
logged in to. For example, you can be logged in to ACD 1 and change the name for ACD 3. This
change does not appear on the changed window border of the ACD until you open a new
window.
!
Important:
Important:
The Dictionary naming rules apply to these procedures. See Dictionary rules on
page 51 for more information.
Permissions on page 58
Administration
July 2007
57
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To add, delete, or modify the name of an ACD, you need write permissions for the
Dictionary subsystem and for the ACD.
To view ACD names, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem and for the
ACD.
58
Administration
July 2007
ACDs
4. In the ACD Name: field, enter the name of the ACD or ACD Group that you want to add,
delete, or change.
The name you assign to an ACD, pseudo ACD, or ACD Group in the Dictionary is
displayed on all reports and window titles that are associated with that ACD.
5. In the ACD Number: field, enter a number between 1 and 38 to correspond with the new
ACD name where 1 through 8 is reserved for real ACDs, 9 through 26 is reserved for
pseudo-ACDs, and 27 through 38 is reserved for ACD Groups.
Any additional information about the ACD can be entered in the Description: field. Only
50 or fewer characters can be entered in this field.
6. To add your changes to the Dictionary, select Actions > Add.
Administration
July 2007
59
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary ACDs window.
4. In the ACD Number: field, enter the number of the ACD, pseudo-ACD, or ACD Group that
you want to modify.
5. From the Actions menu, select Find One.
6. In the ACD Name: field, enter the new name for the selected ACD.
7. To add your changes to the Dictionary, select Actions > Modify.
60
Important:
Deleting an ACD name from the Dictionary only removes the name of the ACD.
The ACD is then displayed as unnamed_acd n where n is the number of the
ACD. No warnings are given during the process of deleting an ACD name. This
procedure should not be performed unless you are certain that you want to delete
the ACD name.
Administration
July 2007
Agent groups
4. In the ACD Number: field, enter the number of the ACD, psuedo-ACD, or ACD Group for
which you want to delete the name.
5. From the Actions menu, select Find One.
The name of the ACD is displayed in the ACD Name: field.
6. Select Actions > Delete to remove the ACD from the Dictionary.
Agent groups
This section provides procedures for creating and naming, copying, and deleting agent groups
in the Dictionary using the Agent Groups window.
Administration
July 2007
61
Agents can be grouped for reporting purposes, without regard to the split/skill assignment for
the agent. For example, you can create a group for new employees or a group for employees
with special skills.
This section contains the following topics:
Permissions on page 62
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
62
To add, delete, or modify agent groups, you need write permissions for the Dictionary
subsystem.
To view agent groups, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
Agent groups
5. In the Agent group name: field, enter the name of the new agent group.
6. To add the agent group to the Dictionary, select Actions > Add.
Administration
July 2007
63
7. To add the Login IDs for this agent group, select Actions > Get Contents.
Supervisor displays the Agent Groups-Get Contents window.
64
Administration
July 2007
Agent groups
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Agent Groups window.
5. In the Agent group name: field, enter the name of the agent group.
6. From the Actions menu, select Get contents.
Supervisor displays the Agent Groups-Get Contents window.
Administration
July 2007
65
5. In the Agent group name: field, enter the name of the new agent group.
66
Administration
July 2007
Agent groups
7. In the Copy from: field, enter the name of the agent group that you want to copy.
8. From the Actions menu, select Copy Group.
The new agent group is automatically populated with all the agents from the copied group.
Administration
July 2007
67
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Agent Groups window.
5. In the Agent group name: field, enter the name of the agent group to which you will add
agents.
6. From the Actions menu, select Get Contents.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary-Agent Groups-Get Contents window.
7. Enter the Login IDs that you want to add to this group.
8. From the Actions menu, select Add.
68
Administration
July 2007
Agent groups
5. In the Agent group name: field, enter the name of the agent group from which agents will
be deleted.
Administration
July 2007
69
70
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Agent Groups window.
5. In the Agent group name: field, enter the name of the agent group to delete.
6. From the Actions menu, select Delete.
The selected agent group name is removed from the Dictionary.
Permissions on page 71
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you will need the following permissions:
To modify agent string values, you need write permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To view agent string values, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
71
72
Administration
July 2007
3. In the ACD: field, select the ACD or ACD Group that you want to modify.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Agent String Values window.
4. Enter a new descriptive word in the field that you want to change. See Agent string value
field descriptions on page 74 for field descriptions.
Administration
July 2007
73
74
Field
Description
Work Mode
Agent Trace
Work Mode
To change the agent trace, work-mode default names, enter the new
descriptive word next to LOGON or LOGOFF.
LOGON - An agent is logged in.
LOGOFF - An agent is logged out and is not available to take ACD
calls.
Call Handling
Preference
Reserve Level
Administration
July 2007
Announcement names
Field
Description
Call Direction
Call Origination
Call Destination
Agent Role
To change the agent role default names, enter the new descriptive
word next to TOP, ALLOCATED, BACKUP, ROVING, or RESERVE.
TOP - The agent can be counted on to answer the skill's calls
(unless an agent's other skills go into overload).
ALLOCATED - The agent has a percentage of his/her time
allocated to answering the skill's calls.
BACKUP - The agent helps to answer the skill's calls when his/her
top skill is not busy.
ROVING - The agent answers a skill's calls when this skill has the
greatest need.
RESERVE - The agent helps answer the skill's calls when the skill
is over threshold. These roles vary according to call-handling
preference.
Announcement names
This section provides information on working with announcement names in the Dictionary.
Announcements are recorded messages that are played for callers. Announcement names are
synonyms assigned to these recorded messages in the Dictionary.
This section contains the following topics:
Permissions on page 76
Administration
July 2007
75
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view announcement names, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify announcement names, you need write permissions for the
Dictionary subsystem.
76
Administration
July 2007
Announcement names
5. In the Announcement Name: field, enter the name that you want to assign to the
announcement.
6.
In the Announcement Number: field, enter a number that will correspond with the
announcement name.
Any additional information about the announcement can be entered in the Description:
field. Only 50 or fewer characters can be entered in this field.
Administration
July 2007
77
5. To find an announcement name to view, only one of the fields requires an announcement
to be specified. Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing announcement
in the Dictionary:
In the Announcement Name: field, enter the synonym name of the announcement.
In the Announcement Number: field, enter the number of the announcement.
78
Administration
July 2007
Announcement names
Administration
July 2007
79
80
Administration
July 2007
Announcement names
5. To find an announcement name to delete, only one of the fields requires an announcement
to be specified so that it can be found in the Dictionary. Perform one of the following
actions to specify an existing announcement in the Dictionary:
Administration
July 2007
81
Permissions on page 82
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
82
To view AUX reason codes, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify AUX reason codes, you need write permissions for the Dictionary
subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
AUX reason code 0 is used for cases in which the switch automatically puts an agent into
AUX work mode. You can change this name.
Names must be unique within an ACD. No two AUX reason codes in the same ACD can
have the same name.
If you make changes to the AUX reason code names you must restart any report that uses
AUX reason codes to see the changes.
Administration
July 2007
83
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary AUX Reason Codes window.
5. In the AUX Reason Code name: field, enter the name for the AUX reason code.
6. In the AUX Reason Code: field, enter the one-digit AUX reason code number, between 0
and 9.
Any additional information about the AUX reason code can be entered in the Description:
field. Only 50 or fewer characters can be entered in this field.
7. From the Action menu, select Add.
84
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary AUX Reason Codes window.
5. To find an AUX reason code name to view, only one of the fields requires an AUX reason
code to be specified. Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing AUX
reason code in the Dictionary:
In the AUX Reason Code name: field, enter the name for the AUX reason code.
In the AUX Reason Code: field, enter the one-digit AUX reason code number,
between 0 and 9.
Administration
July 2007
85
3. In the ACD: field, enter the ACD or ACD Group on which the AUX Reason Codes reside.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary AUX Reason Codes window.
86
Administration
July 2007
5. To find an AUX reason code name to modify, only one of the fields requires an AUX reason
code name to be specified. Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing AUX
reason code name in the Dictionary:
In the AUX Reason Code name: field, enter the name for the AUX reason code.
In the AUX Reason Code: field, enter the one-digit AUX reason code number,
between 0 and 9.
Administration
July 2007
87
88
Administration
July 2007
Calculations
5. To find an AUX reason code name to delete, only one of the fields requires an AUX reason
code to be specified. Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing AUX
reason code in the Dictionary:
In the AUX Reason Code name: field, enter the name for the AUX reason code.
In the AUX Reason Code: field, enter the one-digit AUX reason code number,
between 0 and 9.
Calculations
Calculation names are abbreviated names for the calculations in the database that are used to
create reports. You can view standard calculations or create your own custom calculations to
use in custom reports. The names for calculations used in standard reports already exist in the
Dictionary.
This section contains the following topics:
Permissions on page 89
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view calculations, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To create, delete or modify a custom calculation, you need write permissions for the
Dictionary subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
89
Reports will not run if you embed calculations more than three levels deep.
90
It is recommended that you identify your own calculations in all lowercase letters to
distinguish them from the standard CMS calculations, which are in all uppercase letters.
If you delete a custom calculation from the Dictionary, any reports that it appeared in will
not run.
You can adversely affect standard reports if you change a standard CMS calculation.
Reports will probably run, but the results may be different from those expected.
Reports will not run if you create calculations that reference each other in a circular
fashion. For example, assume that CALC_1 uses CALC_2 in its processing. If CALC_2
then uses CALC_1 in its processing, this creates a circular pattern where processing
cannot be completed.
Administration
July 2007
Calculations
Viewing a calculation
To view a calculation in the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
4. To find a calculation to view, only one of the fields requires a calculation to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing database calculation in the
Dictionary:
If you know the name of the calculation, enter it in the Calculation name: field.
If you do not know the name of the calculation, perform the following steps to view all
the calculations alphabetically:
1. Leave all the fields in the Dictionary Calculations window blank, and from the
Actions menu, select Find One.
Administration
July 2007
91
2. Use the Next or Previous buttons to move through the list of existing calculations.
92
Administration
July 2007
Calculations
Adding a calculation
To add a calculation in the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
!
Important:
Important:
Use lowercase letters in the name to distinguish this custom calculations from a
standard CMS calculation.
Administration
Database items
July 2007
93
Constants
- (subtract)
- * (multiply)
- / (divide)
- ( ) (do first, as in standard mathematical operations)
Any additional information about the calculation can be entered in the Description: field.
Only 50 or fewer characters can be entered in this field.
6. From the Actions menu, select Add.
The custom calculation is added to the Dictionary.
Important:
Modifying a standard CMS calculation is not recommended. If you modify a
standard CMS calculation, the meaning of that calculation is changed in every
report in which it appears.
94
Administration
July 2007
Calculations
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Calculations window.
4. Enter the name of the custom calculation in the Calculation name: field.
5. From the Actions menu, select Find One.
6. In the Calculation: field, enter the new formula.
Any changes to the descriptive information, can be entered in the Description: field.
7. From the Actions menu, select Modify.
Administration
July 2007
95
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Calculations window.
4. Enter the name of the custom calculation in the Calculation name: field.
5. From the Actions menu, select Find One.
Supervisor retrieves and displays the information for the specified calculation, if valid.
6. From the Actions menu, select Delete.
The specified calculation is removed from the Dictionary.
96
Permissions on page 97
Administration
July 2007
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view call work code names, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To add, delete or modify call work code names, you need write permissions for the
Dictionary subsystem.
Call work codes must be activated on the ACD before the administration and naming of
them can be performed.
Call work codes require storage space on the CMS file system. The number of call work
codes available on a system must be configured through the Data Storage Allocation
window. See Chapter 10: Configuring CMS system settings on page 429 for more
information.
Call Work Code 0 is reserved for unadministered work codes so that summary data can
be collected. The default name for Call Work Code 0 is Unadministered codes, but this
name can be modified.
Even though call work codes can be up to 16 digits in length, a Dictionary name can only
be assigned to a call work code that is 9 digits in length.
Administration
July 2007
97
5. In the Call work code name: field, enter the name of the of the new call work code.
6. In the Call work code: field, enter the number of the of the new call work code.
7. From the Actions menu, select Add.
The specified call work code and its associated name is added to the Dictionary.
98
Administration
July 2007
5. To find a call work code name to view, only one of the fields requires a call work code to be
specified. Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing call work code in the
Dictionary:
In the Call work code name: field, enter the name of the call work code.
In the Call work code: field, enter the number of the of the call work code.
Administration
July 2007
99
100
Administration
July 2007
5. To find a call work code name to modify, only one of the fields requires a call work code to
be specified. Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing call work code in
the Dictionary:
In the Call work code name: field, enter the name of the of the call work code.
In the Call work code: field, enter the number of the of the call work code.
Administration
July 2007
101
5. To find a call work code name to delete, only one of the fields requires a call work code to
be specified. Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing call work code in
the Dictionary:
102
In the Call work code name: field, enter the name of the of the call work code.
In the Call work code: field, enter the number of the of the call work code.
Administration
July 2007
Constants
Constants
Constants are items with fixed numerical values that you can enter into the Dictionary for use
only in custom and designer reports. Constants do not exist in CMS when it is installed.
This section contains the following topics:
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view a constant, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To add, delete or modify a constant, you need write permissions for the Dictionary
subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
103
Adding a constant
To add a constant to the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
4. In the Constant name: field, enter the name of the new constant.
5. In the Value: field, enter the numerical value of the constant. The value can range from
-99999 to 999999.
Any additional information about the constant can be entered in the Description: field.
Only 50 or fewer characters can be entered in this field.
6. From the Actions menu, select Add.
104
Administration
July 2007
Constants
Viewing a constant
To view a constant in the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
4. To find a constant to view, only one of the fields requires an entry to be specified. Perform
one of the following actions to specify an existing constant in the Dictionary:
Administration
July 2007
105
106
Administration
July 2007
Constants
Modifying a constant
To modify a constant that is defined in the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
4. To find a constant to modify, only one of the fields requires an entry to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing constant in the Dictionary:
Administration
July 2007
107
Note:
Note:
You cannot modify the name of the new constant. If you want to change the
name, you must delete the old constant and add a new one.
7. From the Actions menu, select Modify.
Deleting a constant
To delete a constant from the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
4. To find a constant to delete, only one of the fields requires an entry to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing constant in the Dictionary:
108
Administration
July 2007
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view a custom database item, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify a custom database item, you need write permissions for the
Dictionary subsystem.
You must first create the table in the database before you create a custom database item.
Administration
July 2007
109
4. In the Database item: field, enter the name of the new database item.
Any additional information about the custom database item can be entered in the
Description: field. Only 50 or fewer characters can be entered in this field.
5. In the Table: field, enter the name of the table that will contain the new custom database
item.
6. From the Actions menu, select Add.
110
Administration
July 2007
4. In the Database item: field, enter the name of the custom database item.
5. From the Actions menu, select Find One.
Supervisor retrieves and displays the information for the specified custom database item, if
valid.
Administration
July 2007
111
4. In the Database item: field, enter the name of the custom database item.
5. From the Actions menu, select List All.
112
Administration
July 2007
4. In the Database item: field, enter the new name for the custom database item.
5. In the Table: and Description: fields, enter the new information for the custom database
item. Only 50 or fewer characters can be entered in the Description: field.
Note:
Note:
Note: You cannot modify the name of a custom database item. You must delete
the old item and add the new item if you want a different name.
6. From the Actions menu, select Modify.
The specified custom database item and its changes are saved to the Dictionary.
Administration
July 2007
113
4. In the Database item: field, enter the name of the database item to delete.
5. From the Actions menu, select Find One.
Supervisor retrieves and displays the information for the specified custom database item, if
valid.
6. From the Actions menu, select Delete.
The specified custom database item is removed from the Dictionary.
114
Administration
July 2007
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view generic string values, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To modify generic string values, you need write permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
115
3. In the ACD: field, enter the ACD or ACD Group on which the generic string values reside.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Generic String Values window.
116
Administration
July 2007
Location IDs
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Generic String Values window.
Location IDs
Location IDs represent the physical location or site where an agent sits or the port network to
which a trunk is assigned. Location IDs can be named for ease of identification in reporting for
multi-site environments. The same location IDs and their synonyms are used for both agents
and trunks.
This section contains the following topics:
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the name of a location ID, you need read permissions for the Dictionary
subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
117
To add, delete, or modify the name of a location ID, you need write permissions for the
Dictionary subsystem.
Adding a location ID
To add a location ID to the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
5. In the Location name: field, enter the name of the new location.
6. In the Location ID: field, enter the number from 1 to 44 for the new location.
Any additional information about the location ID can be entered in the Description: field.
Only 50 or fewer characters can be entered in this field.
118
Administration
July 2007
Location IDs
Viewing a location ID
To view the information associated with an existing location ID in the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
5. To find a location ID to view, only one of the fields requires a value to be specified. Perform
one of the following actions to specify a location ID in the Dictionary:
Administration
July 2007
119
120
Administration
July 2007
Location IDs
Modifying a location ID
To modify an existing location ID in the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
5. To find a location ID to modify, only one of the fields requires a value to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify a location ID in the Dictionary:
Administration
July 2007
121
Deleting a Location ID
To remove a location ID from the Dictionary:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Dictionary.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary window.
5. To find a location ID to delete, only one of the fields requires a value to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify a location ID in the Dictionary:
122
Administration
July 2007
Login ID names
Login ID names
CMS uses agent login IDs to identify measured ACD agents. After an agent's name is assigned
to a login ID, CMS windows and reports show that agent's login ID name instead of the login ID
number.
You do not have to input agent names in the Dictionary, but CMS administration windows and
reports are easier to understand with agent names instead of login IDs. Depending on the
amount of space in the report, agent names can be truncated.
This section contains the following topics:
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view login IDs, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify login IDs, you need write permissions for the Dictionary
subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
123
Login ID names are sorted alphabetically in the Dictionary based on the first character that
you input in the Agent name: field.
For example, if the agent is listed as Jane Brown, CMS sorts on the J for Jane. If the
agent is listed as Brown, Jane CMS sorts on the B in Brown. Supervisor reports do not
automatically sort by agent name, but the user can request the report to do so.
You can assign no more than one agent name to the same login ID.
You cannot assign the same agent name to multiple login IDs.
If you are viewing a real-time report when a change is made to a login ID that appears on
that report, you must exit the report and rerun it to see the change.
124
Administration
July 2007
Login ID names
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Login Identifications window.
5. In the Login ID: field, enter the number of the login ID on which you want to assign a new
name.
6. In the Agent Name: field, enter the name of the agent to be associated with the Login ID
number.
7. From the Actions menu, select Add.
Administration
July 2007
125
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Login Identifications window.
5. To find a login ID to view, only one of the fields requires a value to be specified. Perform
one of the following actions to specify a login ID in the Dictionary:
In the Login ID: field, enter the number of the login ID.
126
Administration
July 2007
Login ID names
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Login Identifications window.
Administration
July 2007
127
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Login Identifications window.
5. To find a login ID to modify, only one of the fields requires a value to be specified. Perform
one of the following actions to specify a login ID in the Dictionary:
In the Login ID: field, enter the number of the login ID.
128
Administration
July 2007
5. To find a login ID to delete, only one of the fields requires a value to be specified. Perform
one of the following actions to specify a login ID in the Dictionary:
In the Login ID: field, enter the number of the login ID.
Administration
July 2007
129
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view logout reason codes, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify logout reason code, you need write permissions for the
Dictionary subsystem.
Logout reason codes are single digits, 0 through 9. A zero is used when the system logs
an agent out or if the agent does not specify a code.
To use logout reason codes, your switch must have the Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
feature.
130
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Logout Reason Codes window.
5. In the Logout Reason Code name: field, enter the name of the new logout reason code.
6. In the Logout Reason Code: field, enter a number from 0 to 9 to be associated with the
logout reason code name.
Any additional information about the logout reason code can be entered in the
Description: field. Only 50 or fewer characters can be entered in this field.
7. From the Actions menu, select Add.
Administration
July 2007
131
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Logout Reason Codes window.
5. To find a logout reason code to view, only one of the fields requires a value to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify a logout reason code in the Dictionary:
In the Logout Reason Code name: field, enter the name of the logout reason code.
In the Logout Reason Code: field, enter a number from 0 to 9 that is associated with
the logout reason code.
132
Administration
July 2007
3. In the ACD: field, enter the ACD or ACD Group on which you want to view all logout
reason code names.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Logout Reason Codes window.
Administration
July 2007
133
5. To find a logout reason code to modify, only one of the fields requires a value to be
specified. Perform one of the following actions to specify a logout reason code in the
Dictionary:
134
In the Logout Reason Code name: field, enter the name of the logout reason code.
In the Logout Reason Code: field, enter the number from 0 to 9 that is associated
with the logout reason code.
Administration
July 2007
Administration
July 2007
135
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Logout Reason Codes window.
5. To find a logout reason code to delete, only one of the fields requires a value to be
specified. Perform one of the following actions to specify a logout reason code in the
Dictionary:
In the Logout Reason Code name: field, enter the name of the logout reason code.
In the Logout Reason Code: field, enter the number from 0 to 9 that is associated
with the logout reason code.
136
Administration
July 2007
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view split/skill string values, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To modify split/skill string values, you need write permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
If you assign values that are longer than the field lengths allowed on standard reports,
those values are truncated to fit on the reports. Similar custom reports can be created to
accommodate the longer string values.
If you do not assign different values to the split/skill string values, the default values are
used.
Administration
July 2007
137
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Split/Skill String Values window.
138
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Split/Skill String Values window.
5. Enter a new split/skill string value in each field that you want to modify.
See Split/skill string value field descriptions on page 140 for more information.
6. From the Actions menu, select Modify.
The split/skill string values and their changes are saved to the Dictionary.
Administration
July 2007
139
Description
Service Level
Changed
The service level is the time limit in seconds for calls to wait in queue
before being answered. The Split/Skill Call Profile reports can be used
to see how many calls were either answered or abandoned within
each service level increment.
The string values in the following fields are displayed on the Split/
Skill Call Profile Report:
140
Administration
YES - The string value in this field will appear on the Split/Skill Call
Profile Report if the service level in the split/skill call profile has
changed.
NO - The string value in this field will appear on the Split/Skill Call
Profile Report if the service level in the split/skill call profile has not
changed.
July 2007
Split/Skill names
Field
Description
Period Changed
Skill State
YES - The string value in this field will appear on the Split/Skill Call
Profile if the time period in the split/skill call profile has changed.
NO - The string value in this field will appear on the Split/Skill Call
Profile if the time period in the split/skill call profile has not
changed.
Skill states are used to specify states for the different skills.
The string values in the following fields represent the following skill
states:
Split/Skill names
You can assign names to your ACD splits or skills. These split/skill names appear on the split/
skill reports, making your reports easier to identify and read.
Split/skill names should reflect the configuration of your splits/skills and ACDs.
Administration
July 2007
141
For example, if you want splits in your system to be divided according to Sales, Customer
Service, and Wholesale, assign those names to the splits that handle those areas of the
business. If you want skills in your system to be divided by language such as French, Spanish,
and German, assign those names to the skills that handle calls in those languages.
This section contains the following topics:
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the name assigned to a split/skill, you need read permissions for the Dictionary
subsystem and for the split/skill.
To add, delete or modify the name assigned to a split/skill, you need write permissions for
the Dictionary subsystem and for the split/skill.
142
It is advised that you be consistent with the names given by your switch administrator.
If you assign a name, the split/skill number no longer appears in split/skill reports or
windows. The split/skill name appears instead.
If you make changes to split/skill names when viewing a report that includes those splits/
skills, you must exit the report and rerun it to see the changes.
Administration
July 2007
Split/Skill names
Administration
July 2007
143
5. To find a split/skill to view, only one of the fields requires a split/skill to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing split/skill in the Dictionary:
144
Administration
July 2007
Split/Skill names
Administration
July 2007
145
5. To find a split/skill to modify, only one of the fields requires a split/skill to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing split/skill in the Dictionary:
146
Administration
July 2007
Split/Skill names
7. In the Split/Skill name: field, enter the new name of the split/skill.
8. From the Actions menu, select Modify.
The split/skill name and its changes are saved to the Dictionary.
5. To find a split/skill to delete, only one of the fields requires a split/skill to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing split/skill in the Dictionary:
Administration
July 2007
147
Split
Logid
Logon
start
Work
mode
Started
Direction
Changed
>*
1000
4000
8:00
AVAIL
8:00
NULL
8:00
>
1001
5966
7:58
ACD
8:04
IN
8:04
>
1002
2200
7:59
ACD
8:03
IN
8:03
>
>
Note:
>* indicates that more database item column headings follow. A dot (.) indicates
that more data follows down the table.
Note:
Permissions
To view the standard database items, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
148
Administration
July 2007
4. In the Database item: field, enter the name of the database item entirely in uppercase
letters.
!
Important:
Important:
If you do not know the entire database item name, enter part of the database item
name along with an asterisk (*) to find the item. You can use pattern searching in
any field in the window.
You can also enter information in the Table: field to limit the search of a database item to a
single table.
Administration
July 2007
149
Note:
Note:
If you used pattern matching in your search for a standard database item, it is
possible that more than one match was found. To view the next database item
that matches the search parameter, select Next from the Actions menu.
Continue to select Next until the appropriate database item is found.
150
Administration
July 2007
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the name that is assigned to a trunk group, you need read permissions for the
Dictionary subsystem and for the trunk group.
To add, delete, or modify the name assigned to a trunk group, you need write permissions
for the Dictionary subsystem and for the trunk group.
When naming trunk groups, you may want to be consistent with the names given to trunk
groups and splits/skills by your switch administrator.
If you assign a trunk group name, the name is displayed on trunk group reports or windows
instead of the trunk group number.
If you make changes to trunk group names while viewing a report that includes those trunk
groups, you must exit the report and rerun it to see the changes.
Administration
July 2007
151
5. In the Trunk group name: field, enter the name of the trunk group.
6. In the Trunk group number: field, enter the number of the trunk group.
Any additional information about the trunk group can be entered in the Description: field.
Only 50 or fewer characters can be entered in this field.
7. From the Actions menu, select Add.
152
Administration
July 2007
5. To find a trunk group to view, only one of the fields requires a trunk group to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing trunk group in the Dictionary:
In the Trunk group name: field, enter the name of the trunk group.
In the Trunk group number: field, enter the number of the trunk group.
Administration
July 2007
153
154
Administration
July 2007
5. To find a trunk group to modify, only one of the fields requires a trunk group to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing trunk group in the Dictionary:
In the Trunk group name: field, enter the name of the trunk group.
In the Trunk group number: field, enter the number of the trunk group.
Administration
July 2007
155
7. In the Trunk group name: or Description field, make the necessary changes for the trunk
group.
8. From the Actions menu, select Modify.
5. To find a trunk group to delete, only one of the fields requires a trunk group to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing trunk group in the Dictionary:
156
In the Trunk group name: field, enter the name of the trunk group.
Administration
July 2007
In the Trunk group number: field, enter the number of the trunk group.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the trunk string values, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
To modify a trunk string value, you need write permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
157
158
Administration
July 2007
4. To change any of the default names, enter the new descriptive word in the text box that is
next to the name that you want to change.
See Trunk string values field descriptions on page 159 for more information on the fields in
the Dictionary Trunk String Values window.
5. From the Actions menu, select Modify when the necessary changes have been
completed.
Description
Trunk State
To change any of the trunk state default names, enter the new
descriptive word next to any of the following:
IDLE - The trunk is waiting for a call.
SEIZED - A call is holding the trunk, either incoming or outgoing.
QUEUED - An ACD call has seized the trunk, is queued to a split/
skill, and is waiting for an agent to become available.
CONN - The caller and an agent are connected on a call.
DABN - The caller has abandoned the call.
FBUSY - The caller receives a forced busy signal.
FDISC - The caller receives a forced disconnect.
HOLD - The agent has put the caller on hold.
MBUSY - The trunk is out of service for maintenance purposes.
RINGING - The call is ringing at an agent's voice terminal.
UNKNOWN - CMS does not recognize the trunk state.
Queue Type
To change the queue type default names, enter the new descriptive
name next to MAIN or BACKUP. The name entered here is displayed
instead of the default value in real-time reports containing the trunk
QUETYPE database item. (Standard reports do not contain this item).
MAIN - The call is queued to a split/skill as a result of a queue to
main split/skill vector command.
BACKUP - The call is queued to a split/skill as a result of a vector
command other than queue to main split/skill.
Administration
July 2007
159
Field
Description
Call Priority
(Non-Vectoring)
Call Priority
(Vectoring)
To change the call priority (vectoring) default names, enter the new
descriptive name next to LOW, MED, HIGH, or TOP. The priority level
at which calls on a trunk queue to a split/skill is specified using either
the queue to split/skill or check split/skill command in
the vector that is processing the call. The name entered here is
displayed instead of the default name in real-time reports containing
the trunk PRIORITY database item. (Standard reports do not contain
this item).
LOW - The call occupying the trunk is queued to a split or skill at
the lowest priority level.
MED - The call occupying the trunk is queued to a split or skill at
the second lowest priority level.
HIGH - The call occupying the trunk is queued to a split or skill at
the second highest priority level.
TOP - The call occupying the trunk is queued to a split or skill at
the highest priority level.
Call Direction
To change the all trunks busy default names, enter the new descriptive
word next to YES or NO.
YES - All trunks in the trunk group are busy (in use or
maintenance).
NO - Not all trunks in the trunk group are busy.
VDN names
From the VDNs window, you can assign names to VDNs so that names instead of numbers
appear on VDN reports and VDN administration windows. VDN names should reflect the
configuration of your ACD and convey one or more of the following:
160
Administration
July 2007
VDN names
The trunk groups assigned to the VDN; for example, WATS 800-331-1111.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the name that is assigned to a VDN, you need read permissions for the Dictionary
subsystem and for the VDN.
To add, delete, or modify the name that is assigned to a VDN, you need write permissions
for the Dictionary subsystem and for the VDN.
The VDNs window is available only if the Call Vectoring feature is installed and activated
on your switch.
VDNs must be created on the switch and assigned for measurement via CMS.
To get a list of VDNs that can be named, run the vector configuration report. While all
VDNs can be named, it is recommended that only those VDNs that are used are then
named instead of all of the VDNs. This will conserve system resources.
If you make changes to the VDN names when a report that includes those VDNs is
running, you must exit the report and rerun it to see the changes.
When naming VDNs, you may want to be consistent with the names given to VDNs by
your switch administrator.
If a name is assigned to a VDN, it will appear on VDN reports and windows instead of the
VDN number.
Administration
July 2007
161
162
Administration
July 2007
VDN names
5. To find a VDN name to view, only one of the fields requires a VDN to be specified. Perform
one of the following actions to specify an existing VDN in the Dictionary:
Administration
July 2007
163
164
Administration
July 2007
VDN names
5. To find a VDN name to modify, only one of the fields requires a VDN to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing VDN in the Dictionary:
Administration
July 2007
165
5. To find a VDN name to delete, only one of the fields requires a VDN to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing VDN in the Dictionary:
166
Administration
July 2007
Vector names
Vector names
From the Vectors window, you can assign names to vectors so that the names instead of the
vector numbers are displayed on vector reports and administration windows. Vector names
should reflect the configuration of your ACD and convey one or more of the following:
The VDNs assigned to the vector; for example, vdn2001, vdn3001, and vdn4001.
The splits or skills to which the vector sends calls; for example, sales1, sales2, AUDIX
system.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the name that is assigned to a vector, you need read permissions for the
Dictionary subsystem and for the vector.
To add, delete, or modify the name that is assigned to a vector, you need write permissions
for the Dictionary subsystem and for the vector.
Administration
July 2007
167
The Vectors window is available only if the Call Vectoring feature is installed and activated
on the switch.
You can assign a name to a vector even if the steps to the vector have not been assigned.
If a name is assigned to a vector, it appears on reports and windows instead of the vector
number.
If you make changes to vector names when a report that includes those vectors is running,
you must exit the report and rerun it to see the changes.
168
Administration
July 2007
Vector names
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Vectors window.
Administration
July 2007
169
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Vectors window.
5. To find a vector name to view, only one of the fields requires a vector to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing vector in the Dictionary:
170
Administration
July 2007
Vector names
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Vectors window.
Administration
July 2007
171
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Vectors window.
5. To find a vector name to modify, only one of the fields requires a vector to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing vector in the Dictionary:
172
Administration
July 2007
Dictionary reports
5. To find a vector name to delete, only one of the fields requires a vector to be specified.
Perform one of the following actions to specify an existing vector in the Dictionary:
Dictionary reports
In the Dictionary window, use the Reports tab to generate reports on most sections of the
Dictionary. These reports can be printed, sent to a file, or displayed on the screen.
This section contains the following topics:
Permissions
To obtain a report, you need read permissions for the Dictionary subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
173
3. In the Reports list, select the Dictionary item on which you want to generate a report.
174
Administration
July 2007
Dictionary reports
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays a report window.
6. Select OK.
Depending on the option that you selected, the report is either sent to a printer or
displayed on the screen.
The following is an example of screen output:
Administration
July 2007
175
176
Administration
July 2007
Dictionary reports
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Dictionary Agent Groups window.
5. In the Agent group name: field, enter the name of the agent group, and then press the
Enter key.
6. Select one of the following options:
Print Report on
7. Select OK.
Depending on the option that you selected, the report is either sent to a printer or
displayed on the screen.
Administration
July 2007
177
178
Administration
July 2007
Splits/Skills
Trunks
Trunk Groups
Agents
Agent Groups
VDNs
Vectors
Background
Reports consist of standard reports, custom reports, and designer reports. Standard reports are
shipped as part of the CMS system. Custom reports are created by contact center
administrators through the CMS ASCII interface. Designer Reports are created through
Supervisor.
Administration
July 2007
179
See the Avaya CMS Custom Reports and Avaya CMS Supervisor Report Designer User Guide
manuals for more information on creating custom and designer reports.
This section includes the following topics:
Most standard reports can also be viewed through the CMS ASCII interface. The
exceptions to this are the Supervisor integrated reports, reports containing charts, and
others.
Custom reports are created through the CMS ASCII interface, but can be viewed through
both the CMS ASCII interface and Supervisor.
Types of reports
The following types of reports can be generated:
180
Standard real-time
Standard historical
Standard integrated
Exceptions
Administration
July 2007
Choosing a report
Any measured subset of the ACD, including agents, splits/skills, trunks/trunk groups,
VDNs, vectors, call work codes, and call records
Agent administration
Dictionary
Exceptions
Maintenance
Choosing a report
Most reports are found in the Reports subsystem found under the Commands item on the
menu bar. This section provides the general procedure for running reports in this subsystem.
Reports may be run by selecting the Real-Time, Historical, or Integrated tab from the Select a
Report window.
Other reports are available on the Reports tab found on the main window of the following
subsystems:
Dictionary
Exceptions
Agent Administration
Maintenance
The reports for the subsystems listed above are not available in the main Reports interface.
Procedures on running reports through the areas other than the Reports subsystem are
covered in their respective chapters. The following procedures provide information on working
with reports from the Reports subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
181
Steps
To run a report from the Reports system.
1. Select Commands > Reports from the Controller Window.
Supervisor displays the Select a Report window.
2. Determine the type of report to be run by select the appropriate tab: Real-Time,
Historical, or Integrated.
3. From the Run Report for ACD: field, select the ACD to serve as the data source for the
report.
4. Select a category from the Category field.
5. Select a report from the Report field.
6. Select OK.
Supervisor displays a report input window similar to the example below. The input fields
vary according to the report and its type.
To continue this process, see the following section, Generating a report on page 183.
182
Administration
July 2007
Generating a report
Generating a report
Once a report type has been selected by following the previous procedure, information must be
entered to define the parameters of the report.
1. To specify an object for the report, such as an agent, vector, VDN, and so forth, perform
one of the following actions:
Manually enter the name or number of the object for the report.
Administration
July 2007
183
Printing a report
Once a report has been generated, a Real-Time or Integrated report can be printed. To print a
Real-time or Integrated report:
1. Select Reports > Print from the menu bar of the report window.
Windows displays the Print window opens.
Select the printer destination by selecting a printer in the Name drop-down list box.
Select the number of copies of this report to be printed in the Number of copies field.
Use the Properties button to change options specific to the selected printer. This
could include image resolution, orientation, and other options.
3. Select OK.
The report is printed based on the options selected.
To print a report to a file on the local system, place a check mark in the Print to file check
box. Set the printer to Generic/Text Printer. Failing to select the Generic/Text Printer will
cause the Print to file check box to be ignored and the report is sent to the selected
printer.
184
Administration
July 2007
2. Select the settings for page margins, page numbers, and table borders, as needed.
3. Select OK to save these settings. The new settings will be applied to the next report that is
printed.
Administration
July 2007
185
Restarting a report
!
Important:
Important:
Work-state drill-down reports cannot be restarted.
To restart a report once it is running on the screen, perform the following steps:
1. Select Restart from the Report menu.
The report window closes and the input window that is used to specify the object of the
report is displayed again.
2. Enter the requested information in the input window and select OK.
Supervisor displays the report window with the newly updated information for the selected
object.
186
Administration
July 2007
The username associated with an automatic script must be assigned all the permissions
required for all operations specified by the script.
No more than four scripting Supervisor sessions, including background sessions initiated
by automatic scripts, can be run simultaneously on a PC.
The PC must be running at the time when an automatic script is scheduled to run.
Once a script is created, it can be started by accessing the script file directly from a
Microsoft Windows Explorer window.
Running reports
Administration
July 2007
187
An interactive script runs in the current Supervisor session and the actions display on the
PC. If the Supervisor session is disconnected from the CMS server, the script will not run.
An automatic script launches a new Supervisor session that logs into CMS and runs the
requested tasks as a background process. Script actions are not displayed on the screen.
Although Supervisor provides the ability to create automatic scripts, a third-party
scheduling program must be used in order to run the scripts automatically on a regular
schedule.
Creating scripts
This section describes how to create interactive or automatic scripts used to run reports.
Interactive and automatic scripts used to run reports have the following differences:
An interactive script runs in the current Supervisor session and the actions display on the
PC. If the Supervisor session is disconnected from the CMS server, the script will not run.
An automatic script launches a new Supervisor session that logs into CMS and runs the
requested tasks as a background process. Script actions are not displayed on the screen.
Although Supervisor provides the ability to create automatic scripts, a third-party
scheduling program must be used in order to run the scripts automatically on a regular
schedule.
188
Administration
July 2007
Creating scripts
Accessing scripts
Scripts can be created and accessed through the Scripts button found on several dialog boxes.
Dialog boxes containing the Scripts button can be accessed through the following menu
selections:
Scripts can also be accessed from agent administration windows or once a report is run. The
Script button is also available when you use any other Supervisor command or tool that allows
you to add or change objects.
Administration
July 2007
189
190
User ID - This read only ID allows automatic scripts to make their connection to the
CMS server. The login ID and password are not validated until an automatic script is
run.
Logging Level - The extent to which script-related activities and outputs are logged,
according to the following criteria:
Minimum - Logged activities are limited to those errors and messages from
Supervisor which would otherwise be displayed when the scripts are run manually.
Normal - Logged activities include those recorded at the Minimum setting, plus the
following information: task start time; task end time; name of the script.
Maximum - Logged activities include all those recorded at Minimum and Normal
settings, plus additional error messages which may be useful for debugging a script.
Log File: Path - Allows you to specify a non-default file directory path. Selecting the
folder icon to the right of this field also lets you browse the file system to select a log
file directory.
Log File: Size - Allows you to specify the size of the log file before it rolls over and
begins to overwrite itself.
Administration
July 2007
Creating scripts
2. Select the tab associated with the type of report you want to run (Real-Time, Historical, or
Integrated), and then highlight the report from the categories and listings which are
displayed.
3. Select the Script button on the report selector window.
Supervisor displays the Save as Script window.
4. Select a directory and file name for the script and select Save.
Supervisor closes the Save as Script window and returns you to the report selector
window.
Administration
July 2007
191
2. To select a report for scripting, select the appropriate report type from the dialog box tabs
(Real-Time, Historical, or Integrated), highlight the report, and select OK.
Supervisor displays the input window for the selected report.
3. Enter the appropriate data in the input window and run the report by selecting OK.
Supervisor displays the selected report.
192
Administration
July 2007
Creating scripts
Note:
Note:
If a historical report was selected, set the Destination controls to View Report
on Screen.
4. In the dialog displayed for the report, select Reports > Script from the main menu.
Supervisor displays the Save as Script window.
5. Select a directory and file name for the script. The file type is set to automatic by default.
6. Select Save.
Executing this automatic script causes the report to run with the inputs provided during its
creation.
The data export dialog box is displayed. The dialog that is displayed will vary according to
which export option is selected.
Some of these options can also be selected from a pop-up menu by performing a
right-click in the report window.
Administration
July 2007
193
3. Set the appropriate options in the data export dialog, and then select the Script button.
!
Important:
Important:
Do not select OK after the options are selected.
194
Administration
July 2007
Displaying an input window for actions, not reports, requiring data entry when the script is
run.
Administration
July 2007
195
Dictionary
Exceptions
Maintenance
System Setup
Agent Administration
Steps
To create a script for an input window:
1. Select the necessary item from the Commands menu on the Controller Window.
Supervisor displays the associated selector window for the item selected.
!
Important:
196
Important:
Do not double-click the option or press the Enter key when an operation is
highlighted or the action will be initiated and the script recording will be aborted.
Administration
July 2007
2. Highlight the operation to be made into a script from the Operations: list on the
Operations tab of the selector window and then select the Script button in the selector
window.
Supervisor displays the Save as Script window.
The file type is set to Interactive by default.
3. Complete the Save as Script window by entering a file name and folder location and then
select Save when finished.
Supervisor displays an acknowledgment message to indicate that the script has been
saved.
4. Select the OK button on the acknowledgment message box.
Supervisor closes the Save as Script window and the selector window remains open.
Scripting an action
Use this procedure to create a script that results in the execution of an action. Running the
saved script will cause an Add, Modify, Delete, or No action action to be performed for the
selected operation.
To script a Supervisor action:
1. Select the necessary item from the Commands menu on the Controller Window. Valid
items for scripting an action include:
Dictionary
Exceptions
Maintenance
System Setup
Agent Administration
Supervisor displays the selector window associated with the selected item.
Administration
July 2007
197
2. Highlight the operation to be made into a script from the Operations: list on the
Operations tab of the selector window.
Note:
Note:
If the Cancel button is selected, Supervisor dismisses this window and displays
the input window without saving an action.
7. In the Save as Script window, select a file folder location and file name.
8. Specify the script type as either Automatic or Interactive.
198
Administration
July 2007
9. Select Save.
Supervisor displays an acknowledgment message box stating that the script has been
saved.
10. Select the OK button on the acknowledgment message box
Supervisor displays the Save as Script - Action window.
Organizing scripts
The Organize Scripts window provides a simple file management interface which allows you to
rename, delete or move script files.
To organize existing Supervisor scripts:
1. Select Scripts > Organize Scripts... from the menu bar on the Controller Window.
Supervisor displays the Organize Scripts window.
2. Perform actions on the scripts as needed. This can include renaming, deleting, and
moving.
3. When you are finished organizing scripts, select Close to exit the Organize Scripts
window.
Administration
July 2007
199
Reason
Solution
(Action) Supervisor
displays the Save as
Script: Add or
Replace window.
200
Administration
July 2007
Traces can be activated for a maximum of 400 agents at a time across all ACDs from one
CMS server. This maximum does not take into account whether or not the agents are
logged in. It also applies to the number of agents who are administered and traced by one
server across all ACDs. To avoid compromising performance, activate only the traces that
you need.
Administration
July 2007
201
A maximum of 500,000 agent trace records can be stored. The oldest record is discarded
and overwritten by the newest record when the file reaches the allocated maximum
number of records.
Turning a trace off does not delete the trace records for that agent. Agent trace records are
overwritten automatically when the trace file reaches the maximum number of allocated
records.
The settings in the Data Storage Allocation window determine the maximum number of
agent trace records that CMS can record. See Data Storage Allocation on page 436 for
more information on this window.
Starting and stopping agent traces requires that the Data Collection feature is currently
activated.
An agent trace must be started before the Agent Trace report can be run.
Scripts can open and use the Activate Agent Trace window. You can also schedule the
script. See Chapter 5: Scripting CMS operations on page 187, for more information on
scripting.
The Activate Agent Trace window can be set on a timetable. See Chapter 13: Using
timetables and shortcuts on page 579, for more information.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
202
To start or stop an agent trace, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires write permission for the Agent Administration subsystem.
To view an agent trace report, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires
read permission for the Reports subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
Steps
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Agent Administration.
Supervisor displays the Agent Administration window.
On Communication Manager systems with EAS:
Administration
July 2007
203
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Activate Agent Trace window.
5. In the Agent names or logids: field, enter the names or login IDs of the agents who are to
be traced or are being traced.
This field can accept multiple values. Multiple values must be separated by a semicolon
(;).
Using the Browse button to the right of this field will only display those agents that have
synonyms assigned to them through the Dictionary.
6. Perform one of the following actions for the Agent trace: options:
7. Select Actions > Modify from the menu bar to start or stop the agent trace.
The status bar displays Working and then, if successful, displays Successful when the
operation finishes.
204
Administration
July 2007
Administration
July 2007
205
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Activate Agent Trace window.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
206
To list all agents traced, the user ID used to start this Supervisor session must have read
permission for the Agent Administration subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To list all agents with trace data:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Agent Administration.
Supervisor displays the Agent Administration window.
Note:
Note:
The procedure for viewing agent trace records varies according to the information
that you enter in the fields of the List Agents Traced window. The results for
listing agents traced relies on the entries made in the Agent(s): field, the Dates:
field, or a combination of the two. For example, you can specify a small range of
agents in the Agent(s): field and a date range in the Dates: field. This will result
in a list of only the specified agents for the date range entered.
5. Use the following descriptions to determine how information is entered in the Agent(s):
and Dates: fields:
Administration
July 2007
207
Use the Agent(s): field to specify none, one, or more agents to use in displaying agent
trace records.
Leave this field blank to show all agent trace records for the dates entered in the
Dates: field.
Only those agents with login IDs in the Dictionary can be entered in the Agent(s):
field.
This field can accept multiple values. Multiple values must be separated by a
semicolon (;).
Use the Dates: field to specify no date, a single date, multiple dates, or a range of
dates.
Leave this field blank to show all agent trace records for the agents entered in the
Agent(s): field.
This field can accept multiple dates or a range of dates. Multiple dates must be
separated by a semicolon (;).
Leave both the Agent(s): and Dates: fields blank to have Supervisor display all agent
trace records.
6. Select Actions > List All to display the agent trace records that match the information that
you entered in the Agent(s): and Dates: fields.
Supervisor displays a secondary window listing the dates and agents for which agent trace
data is available, sorted by date.
208
Administration
July 2007
The Change Agent Skills item is only available for ACDs on which EAS is activated.
When agent skills are changed, the change is made to the Communication Manager
system and remains in effect until another change is made through Supervisor or the
Communication Manager system itself.
When agent skills are changed, you cannot exit the Change Agent Skills window until the
ACD responds to the requested agent changes.
A template can be any existing agent profile where the skill settings of the profile are
applied to other agent profiles. You can specify multiple agents individually and by using
ranges. Entries must be separated with semicolons. You are limited to 250 characters in
this field. After you apply the skill settings, any changes that you make to the agent profile
that was originally used as the template do not affect the other agent profiles.
Skill changes take effect immediately for agents who are in AUX work mode, AVAIL
(available), or logged out. Changes are pending for agents on calls or in ACW work mode
until the agent enters the AUX work mode, becomes available, or logs out. Because of
this, agents who frequently have calls on hold may have skill changes remain pending for
a longer time than expected.
Changing agent skills should only be done through Supervisor as it checks if the agent has
the appropriate permissions for the newly assigned skills. The CMS ASCII interface does
not perform permission checking which can result in agents belonging to skills to which
they do not have permissions.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view agent skill assignments, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Agent Administration subsystem.
To change agent skills, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires write
permission for the Agent Administration subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
209
Steps
To change skills for an agent:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Agent Administration.
Supervisor displays the Agent Administration window.
2. In the ACD field, select the ACD for which you want to change agent skills.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Change Agent Skills.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Select Agent/Template window.
5. In the Select Agent/Template window, enter the Agent ID using one of the following
methods in order view or change their skills:
An agent template
See the beginning of this section for more information on agent templates.
210
Administration
July 2007
6. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Change Agent Skills window with the agent or template name
and login ID in the title bar.
The skills and skill level for the agent or template that you named are shown in the
Assigned Skills field and Level field, respectively.
Skill names are shown for the skills that are defined in the Dictionary. Skill numbers are
shown for the skills that are not defined in the Dictionary.
These skill settings for an agent can be passed on to other agent profiles. To specify the
agents who are to receive the skill settings, select Use for one or more Agents and enter
the agent IDs in the associated field.
Administration
July 2007
211
7. Choose one of the following options to change the skills of this agent or template.
If...
Then...
212
Administration
July 2007
If...
Then...
Administration
July 2007
213
If...
Then...
214
Administration
July 2007
If...
Then...
When agent skills are changed, the change is made to the Communication Manager
system and remains in effect until another change is made through Supervisor or the
Communication Manager system.
You cannot exit from the Multi-Agent Skill Change window until the Communication
Manager system responds to the requested changes.
Skill changes take effect immediately for agents who are in AUX work mode, AVAIL
(available), or logged out. Changes are pending for agents on calls or in ACW work mode
until the agent enters the AUX work mode, becomes available, or logs out.
For agents who frequently have calls on hold, skill changes can remain pending for a
longer time than expected.
Administration
July 2007
215
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view agent skill assignments, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Agent Administration subsystem.
To change agent skills, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires write
permission for the Agent Administration subsystem and for the skills to which agents are
assigned.
Steps
To change one skill for multiple agents:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Agent Administration.
Supervisor displays the Agent Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD for which you want to change agent skills.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight the Multi-Agent Skill Change item.
216
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Multi-Agent Skill Change window.
Supervisor displays a second window that shows the agents assigned to this skill who are
currently logged in.
Clicking the left mouse button on the column headings sorts the contents between
ascending and descending order.
To view or change the current skills of an agent in the skill window, double-click the agent
name.
6. To move agents from the current skill to another skill, perform one of the following actions:
Administration
July 2007
217
To move a single agent, use the mouse to drag-and-drop an agent to a new skill in the
Skill List window.
To move multiple agents to a new skill, hold down the Ctrl key and click on multiple
agents to select them. You can select a range of agents by clicking on the agent at the
beginning of the range, holding down the Shift key, and then clicking the agent at the
bottom of the range.
Use the drag-and-drop method to move the agents from the window for their current
skill to a new skill in the Skill List window.
Another way of moving agents from one skill to another is to open a window for the
new, target skill by double-clicking that skill in the Skill List window. You can then
drag-and-drop agents between the two skill windows.
Note that holding down the Ctrl key while dragging and dropping agents will add, not
move, the agent or agents to the new skill.
Supervisor displays the Move Agents Between Skills window with the Agents field
showing the following:
The percent allocation for the skill of each agent. Percent allocation is only available
on Communication Manager systems with Avaya Business Advocate.
The Move group displays information showing the skills involved in moving this agent. If
the agent is being added to a new skill, not moved, the From Skill: information is blank
and the Preserve Original Levels option is unavailable.
7. In the Move Agents Between Skills window, perform one of the following actions to
complete moving agents from skill to skill:
218
Select the Level option and enter a skill-level value for each agent that you moved to
this new skill.
Administration
July 2007
To keep the current skill level of the agent, select the Preserve Original Level option.
This action deactivates the Level option.
8. Select OK.
If one or more agent moves fail, Supervisor displays a status window showing the reasons
for failure. Otherwise, the status window notifies you that the change is pending.
You cannot exit from the Change Extension Split Assignments window until the
Communication Manager system responds to the requested changes.
Extension split assignment changes take effect immediately for agents who are in AUX
work mode, AVAIL (available), or logged out. Changes are pending for agents on calls or in
ACW work mode until the agent enters the AUX work mode, becomes available, or logs
out.
For agents who frequently have calls on hold, extension split assignment changes can
remain pending for a long time.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view extension split assignments, you need read permission for the Agent
Administration subsystem.
To change extension split assignments, you need write permission for the Agent
Administration subsystem and for the splits to which the extensions are assigned.
Administration
July 2007
219
Steps
To change an extension split assignment:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Agent Administration.
Supervisor displays the Agent Administration window.
2. In the ACD field, select the ACD for which you want to change extension split
assignments.
3. Select Operations > Change Extension Split Assignments.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Select Extension window.
5. In the Select Extension window, enter the extension number for which the split
assignment is to be changed.
The extensions that are assigned to each split can be viewed in the Move Extensions
Between Splits window. See Moving extensions between splits on page 222 for more
information.
220
Administration
July 2007
6.
Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Change Extension Split Assignments window.
The Move Extension From Split field shows the current split assignment. The Move
Extension To Split field shows available split names or numbers. If an agent is logged in
on the extension, the logged-in icon is displayed as shown in the above graphic. If an
agent is not logged in on the extension, an icon is not displayed.
7. Perform one of the following actions:
If...
Then...
Then...
Administration
July 2007
221
9. Select OK.
CMS applies the split assignment changes made to the extension.
You cannot exit from the Move Extensions Between Splits window until the
Communication Manager system responds to your request.
Extension split assignment changes take effect immediately for agents who are in AUX
work mode, AVAIL (available), or logged out. Changes are pending for agents on call or in
ACW work mode until the agent enters the AUX work mode, becomes available, or logs
out.
For agents who frequently have calls on hold, an extension move request can remain
pending for an extended period of time.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
222
To view extension assignments, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Agent Administration subsystem and the affected splits.
To move extension assignments, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires write permission for the Agent Administration subsystem and the affected splits.
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To move extensions between splits:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Agent Administration.
Supervisor displays the Agent Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the extensions to move.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Move Extensions Between Splits.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Move Extensions Between Splits window.
5. Select the split to work with by performing one of the following actions:
Highlight the split to work with in the Split List window and then select Split > Open
selected split from the menu bar.
Administration
July 2007
223
6. To move one or more extensions from the current split to another split, perform one of the
following actions:
To move multiple extensions to a new split, hold down the Ctrl key and click on
multiple extensions to select them. You can select a range of extensions by clicking on
the extension at the beginning of the range, holding down the Shift key, and then
clicking the extension at the bottom of the range.
Use the drag-and-drop method to move the extensions from the window for their
current split to a new split in the Split List window.
Another way of moving extensions from one split to another is to open a window for
the new, target split by double-clicking that split in the Split List window. You can then
drag-and-drop extensions between the two split windows.
7. Select OK in the Move Extensions Between Splits window to complete the moving of the
selected extensions.
224
Administration
July 2007
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To run a split members report, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Agent Administration subsystem and for all affected splits.
Steps
To run a split members report:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Agent Administration.
Supervisor displays the Agent Administration window.
Administration
July 2007
225
6. Enter the split information in the Splits: field. This can be one split, multiple splits, or a
range of splits. Multiple splits must be separated by a semicolon (;).
7. In the Destination group, select View Report on Screen or Print Report on:.
8. Select OK.
Supervisor displays or prints the Split Members report.
If the split does not have a name assigned, the Split Name columns on the report shows
the split number. If the split has no extensions assigned to it, the Extension column is
blank.
226
Administration
July 2007
ACD Groups
An ACD Group is an administrator-assigned collection of ACDs.
This section contains the following topics:
Administration
July 2007
227
Availability
If you add an ACD Group, you will need to log out of Supervisor and log back in to see this
group as a choice in the appropriate dialogs.
Capacities/Performance
Roles/Definitions
228
When created, ACD Groups will be assigned an ACD ID number from 27 through 38. This
number is automatically assigned by CMS and cannot be altered.
ACD Groups will not disallow an ACD being added as a member based on its version or
feature set.
When an ACD Group is deleted, all synonyms assigned to its member ACDs will remain.
Administration
July 2007
ACD Groups
Names must begin with an alphabetic character and can be up to 20 characters long. Valid
characters are alphanumerical (a-z, A-Z, 0-9), underscore (_), blank ( ), comma (,),
period (.), single quote ('), and plus (+). Multiple values are not allowed.
Synonyms
Overlapping ACD Groups (groups having common member ACDs), could result in
synonym conflict within the members of an ACD Group if poorly administered. Because of
this capability, entity IDs in overlapping ACD Groups must be mutually exclusive.
Entity synonyms must be unique for an ACD Group and across all of the ACDs that are
members of the ACD Group.
Other
User permissions are administered separately for an ACD Group and its member ACDs.
CMS real-time custom reports are only displayed if data collection is enabled and the ACD
link status is 'up' for at least one member ACD in the specified ACD Group. An error
message will be displayed if these conditions are not met.
Custom reports that are created with the Single ACD Only option enabled cannot be run
for an ACD Group and vice versa.
If a backup was created on a CMS server where the Global Dictionary feature was
authorized, the data can only be restored on a CMS server that also has this feature
authorized. If the Global Dictionary feature authorizations between a backup and the target
CMS server do not match, an error is displayed, a message is written to the error log, and
the restore or migration fails.
Administration
July 2007
229
The reporting of data from multiple ACDs through the use of custom reports. Reports for
ACD Groups collect, aggregate, and display contact center data as a single value for the
ACD Group instead of one set of values for each member ACD. Custom reports can be
created through the CMS ASCII interface or ordered through the Avaya Professional
Services Organization. For example, the reporting aspect of this feature can be used to
view data for a CMS entity across multiple ACDs such as a skill, a specific agent login ID,
and so forth.
Call Center Administration - This subsystem is used for administrators to create, modify,
and delete ACD Groups.
Dictionary - This subsystem is used by CMS users who need to view ACD Groups, their
contents, and to assign ACD Group synonyms.
Permissions
To create, modify, and delete ACD Groups, a CMS user must have the read and write
permissions for the Call Center Administration subsystem.
If a CMS user only requires the ability to view ACD Groups and the member ACDs, read
permission is required for the Dictionary subsystem.
To assign synonyms to an ACD group, a CMS user requires the read and write
permissions for the Dictionary subsystem as well as the ACD Group and its member
ACDs.
230
Administration
July 2007
ACD Groups
Steps
To add an ACD Group to CMS:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
4. In the ACD Group Name: field, enter a name for this new ACD Group.
5. From the menu bar, select Actions > Add.
CMS creates the ACD Group and assigns an ACD Group Number.
Administration
July 2007
231
Listing all ACD Groups can be done through either the Call Center Administration or
Dictionary subsystems. Only those CMS users who have read permission for the Call Center
Administration subsystem can use the procedure listed below. CMS users who only work with
synonyms or running reports should use the procedure associated with the Dictionary
subsystem for listing all ACD Groups.
Steps
To list all ACD Groups defined on the CMS server:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
4. From the menu bar, select Edit > Clear All to remove any data from the fields.
232
Administration
July 2007
ACD Groups
Steps
To add an ACD to an existing ACD Group:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
Administration
July 2007
233
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration ACD Groups window.
4. In the ACD Group Name: field, enter the name of the ACD Group that will receive a new
ACD member.
5. Select Actions > Find One from the menu bar.
If the ACD Group name is valid, its numeric ID is displayed in the ACD Group Number
field and 1 matches found is displayed in the status bar.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Get contents.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Admin ACD Groups Get contents dialog.
7. From the ACD drop-down list box, select the ACD that will be added to this group.
Note:
Note:
If a CMS user does not have read and write permissions for an ACD, that ACD
will not appear in this list. To view all of the ACDs assigned to this ACD Group,
see Viewing the contents of an ACD Group on page 234.
8. Select Actions > Add from the menu bar.
The selected ACD is added to this ACD Group and Successful is displayed in the status
bar.
234
Administration
July 2007
ACD Groups
Viewing the contents of an ACD Group can be done through either the Call Center
Administration or Dictionary subsystems. Only those CMS users who have read permission
for the Call Center Administration subsystem can use the following procedure. CMS users
who only work with synonyms or running reports should use the procedure in ACD Groups on
page 54.
Steps
To view the current contents of an ACD Group:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
4. In the ACD Group Name: field, enter the name of the ACD Group you want to view.
Note:
Note:
If you are unsure of the name of the ACD Group, use Listing all ACD Groups on
page 231 to determine the name.
5. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
If the ACD Group name is valid, its numeric ID is displayed in the ACD Group Number
field and 1 matches found is displayed in the status bar.
Administration
July 2007
235
Note:
Note:
If you do not select the (none) item, only the selected item in the ACD list will be
displayed in the resulting dialog if it is a member of the specified ACD Group. If it
is not a member of the ACD Group, the resulting dialog will be blank.
8. From the menu bar, select Actions > List all.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Admin ACD Groups Get Contents List All dialog
showing all ACDs that are members of this ACD Group.
236
Administration
July 2007
ACD Groups
Steps
To remove an ACD from an ACD Group:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
4. In the ACD Group Name: field, enter the name of the ACD Group from which you want to
delete a member ACD.
Note:
Note:
If you are unsure of the name of the ACD Group, use the procedure, Listing all
ACD Groups on page 231.
Administration
July 2007
237
6. In the ACD drop-down list box, select the ACD to remove from this ACD Group.
Note:
Note:
If a CMS user does not have read and write permissions for an ACD, that ACD
will not appear in this list. To view all of the ACDs assigned to this ACD Group,
see Viewing the contents of an ACD Group on page 234.
7. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
If the select ACD is a member of the specified ACD Group, 1 matches found is displayed
in the status bar.
8. Select Actions > Delete.
The selected ACD is removed from the specified ACD Group and Supervisor displays a
message box asking if the synonyms assigned to this ACD should be removed as well.
9. Select the Yes button to remove all synonyms that were assigned to this ACD through
ACD Group administration. Otherwise, select No to preserve all synonyms on the ACD.
238
Administration
July 2007
ACD Groups
Steps
To modify the name of an existing ACD Group:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
4. In the ACD Group Name: field, enter the name of the ACD Group to change.
If you do not know the name of the ACD Group, use the procedure, Listing all ACD
Groups on page 231.
5. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find One.
If the ACD Group name is valid, its numeric ID is displayed in the ACD Group Number
field and 1 matches found is displayed in the status bar.
6. In the ACD Group Name field, change the name of this ACD Group
See Before you begin on page 228 for information on naming conventions.
7. When you have finished changing the name of the ACD Group, select Actions > Modify
from the menu bar.
The modification for the ACD Group is made to the CMS database and Successful is
displayed in the status bar.
Administration
July 2007
239
Steps
To remove an ACD Group from the CMS server:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
4. In the ACD Group Name: field, enter the name of the ACD Group to delete.
If you do not know the name of the ACD Group, you can find it using the procedure, Listing
all ACD Groups on page 231.
240
Administration
July 2007
Note:
Call work codes must be positive integers with 1 to 16 digits. Names can be assigned in
the Dictionary to call work codes that consist of nine digits or less. It is recommended that
a fixed number of digits be used consistently for all call work codes. The use of a
consistent number of digits makes it easier to add, delete, and search for call work codes.
Administration
July 2007
241
Call work code 0 is always assigned and is used to collect information on unassigned call
work codes. Call work code 0 cannot be deleted. If an agent enters an unassigned call
work code, it is displayed as code 0 on the call work code report. If a call work code
exception is defined, the agent exceptions historical report shows the agents who entered
invalid or unassigned call work codes.
Disk space must be allocated for call work codes before they can be used. Call work codes
are assigned to a specific ACD. The number of call work codes that can be assigned
depends on the Data Storage Allocation settings for the ACD. See Data Storage
Allocation on page 436 for more information.
Daily, weekly, and monthly standard historical reports are available for call work codes.
Call work codes also appear on the standard historical call record report. See the Avaya
CMS Supervisor Reports document for more information.
For standard call work code reports, the codes are assigned in the Call Work Codes
window.
To have a name refer to a call work code in a report instead of its numerical code, the
name must first be assigned in the Dictionary.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure to be performed, the following permissions are needed:
To view call work codes, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires read
permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem.
To add or delete call work codes, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read and write permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem.
242
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To add a call work code:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
The following fields are displayed in the Call Work Codes window:
Number of codes allocated: - Total number of call work codes that exist in the CMS
database
Number of codes administered: - Total number of call work codes currently in use
Call work code(s): - Used to specify a call work code that will receive an action
4. Enter the new call work code in the Call work code(s): field.
5. Select Actions > Add.
The status bar displays Successful if the call work code is added to the CMS database.
Administration
July 2007
243
Steps
To view a call work code:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
4. Enter the call work code to view in the Call work code(s): field.
5. Select Actions > Find one.
If the call work code exists in the CMS database, the status bar displays the message, 1
matches found.
244
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To list all call work codes in the CMS database:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
Administration
July 2007
245
Steps
To delete a call work code:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
4. Enter the call work code that you want to delete in the Call work code(s): field.
5. Select Actions > Find one.
If the specified call work code is found in the CMS database, the status bar displays the
message, 1 matches found.
6. Select Actions > Delete.
The status bar displays Successful if the call work code is deleted from the CMS
database.
246
Administration
July 2007
You can only work with VDN skill preferences on a Communication Manager system and
the Expert Agent Selection (EAS) feature is present and activated.
When VDN skill preferences are changed through Supervisor, the change takes place
immediately on the Communication Manager system. This can affect the processing of
calls at the time of the change.
If the changes to VDN skill preferences should occur at a specific time, they can be run
through scripts that can then be scheduled through a third-party scheduling application.
Administration
July 2007
247
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view current VDN skill preferences, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and the affected
VDNs.
To change VDN skill preferences, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires write permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and the affected
VDNs.
Steps
To change a VDN skill preference:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which VDN skill preferences will be changed.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Change VDN Skill Preferences.
248
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Change VDN Skill Preferences window.
5. In the VDN(s): field, enter the VDN for which skill preferences are to be changed.
6. From the Actions menu, select Find one.
The status bar displays a successful message if the VDN was found.
7. Enter skill preferences for the VDN in the 1st:, 2nd:, and 3rd: fields using one of the
following methods:
Use the Browse button at the right of each field to select a skill.
Administration
July 2007
249
Steps
To view one or more existing VDN skill preferences:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which VDN skill preferences will be viewed.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Change VDN Skill Preferences.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Change VDN Skill Preferences window.
5. In the VDN(s): field, enter the VDN for which skill preferences are to be viewed.
6. From the Actions menu, select Find one.
The status bar displays a successful message if the VDN was found and lists the skill
preferences, if any exist for this VDN.
250
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To list all VDN skill preferences:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the VDNs and their skill preferences will be
viewed.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Change VDN Skill Preferences.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Change VDN Skill Preferences window.
Administration
July 2007
251
252
Each service-level increment value can be set to a different length of time in seconds.
Each of the first nine service-level increments can have a different time length and
represents a unit of wait time. The number of seconds for the second through the ninth
increment must be at least 1 second greater than the number of seconds in the previous
increment.
CMS counts the calls that are either answered or abandoned within each increment and
shows the totals on split/skill call profile reports. Therefore, the settings of these
increments affect what is displayed in reports.
Making changes to the service level field after data was collected with a different service
level value causes reports to give inaccurate data for the Percent within Service Level
value. If you must change the service level, it is best to change the value at midnight on
the first day of a month so that data for the entire month is gathered using the same
service level value.
Administration
July 2007
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view split/skill call profiles, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires
read permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and all affected splits and
skills.
To add, delete, or change a split/skill call profile, the user ID used to log in to this
Supervisor session requires write permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem
and all affected splits and skills.
Steps
To add a split/skill call profile:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the new split/skill call profile will be created.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Split/Skill Call Profile Setup.
Administration
July 2007
253
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Split/Skill Call Profile Setup window.
The Acceptable service level: field, has been set to 1800 seconds to correspond with
the intrahour interval on the CMS server.
Inc 1 has been set for the range of 0 to 5 seconds. Inc 2 ranges covers 5 to 15
seconds. The other service level increments continue on until Inc 10. This last service
level increment is used in this example is for those calls that extend beyond 360 seconds.
If a call is not addressed after the acceptable service level of 1800 seconds, the call is
then tracked in a different CMS database category.
254
Administration
July 2007
7. In the Service level increments (seconds): fields, enter a progressively greater number
of seconds in each to field. Each field can support values from 0 to 999.
If the unanswered call surpasses the time limit for an increment, it moves on to the next
increment. For example, 0 to 5 to 10 to 25 represents 0 to 5 seconds, 6 to 10
seconds, and 11 to 25 seconds.
Each of the nine increments can vary in length, for example, 0 to 15, 16 to 20, 21 to 26, 27
to 38, 39 to 43, and so forth.
If these fields are not supplied with data, 0 is used for all service level increments and all
calls appear in the first increment on the split/skill call profile report.
8. Select Actions > Add.
The status bar displays a message stating if the operation succeeded or failed.
Steps
To view an existing split/skill call profile:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the existing split/skill call profile resides.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Split/Skill Call Profile Setup.
Administration
July 2007
255
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Split/Skill Call Profile Setup window.
5. In the Split(s)/Skill(s): field, enter the split or skill that is represented by the call profile to
view.
6. From the Actions menu, select Find One.
The status bar displays a Successful message if the call profile for the specified split or
skill is found. Additionally, Supervisor populates the Service Level Increments
(seconds): fields with the service level increments for this call profile.
256
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To modify a split/skill call profile:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the split/skill call profile to modify resides.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Split/Skill Call Profile Setup.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Split/Skill Call Profile Setup window.
5. In the Split(s)/Skill(s): field, enter the split or skill on which the call profile to modify
resides.
6. From the Actions menu, select Find One.
The status bar displays a Successful message if the call profile for the specified split or
skill is found. Additionally, Supervisor populates the Service Level Increments
(seconds): fields with the service level increments for this call profile.
Administration
July 2007
257
7. Enter the new values in the Acceptable service level: or the Service level increments
(seconds): fields.
8. From the Actions menu, select Modify.
The status bar displays a Successful message when the operation completes.
Steps
To delete an existing split/skill call profile:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the split/skill call profile to delete resides.
258
Administration
July 2007
4. In the Split(s)/Skill(s): field, enter the split or skill on which the call profile to delete
resides.
5. From the Actions menu, select Find One.
The status bar displays a Successful message if the call profile for the specified split or
skill is found. Additionally, Supervisor populates the Service Level Increments
(seconds): fields with the service level increments for this call profile.
6. From the Actions menu, select Delete.
Supervisor deletes the specified split/skill call profile and displays a Successful message
in the status bar.
Administration
July 2007
259
Automatic-in trunk groups, such as those that are used as Listed Directory Numbers, must
be assigned to VDNs or splits through an administration tool for the Communication
Manager system.
DID or dial-repeating trunks, such as those that toll-free numbers are assigned to, are not
assigned to VDNs or splits since the Central Office (CO) passes VDN digits or the split
extension number to the Communication Manager system. Because of this, toll-free
numbers do not appear during these procedures.
Vector-controlled splits cannot have trunk groups assigned to them because they can only
receive calls through vector processing.
The Trunk Group Assign window used in these procedures cannot be used to change
trunk group assignments. Changing trunk group assignments is done through an
administration tool for the Communication Manager system.
Permissions
To view trunk group assignments, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires
read permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and for all affected trunk groups,
splits, and VDNs.
260
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To view all trunk group assignments:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which trunk group assignments are to be viewed.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Trunk Group Assignments.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Trunk Group Assign window.
Administration
July 2007
261
Steps
To view the assigned VDN or split for a single trunk group:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD for which trunk group assignments are to be viewed.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Trunk Group Assignments.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Admin: Trunk Group Assign window.
5. In the Trunk Groups: field, enter the trunk group for which assignments are to be viewed.
More than one trunk group can be entered in this field. Multiple trunk groups must be
separated with a semicolon (;).
262
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To view the trunk group that is assigned to a VDN or skill:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD for which trunk group assignments are to be viewed.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Trunk Group Assignments.
Administration
July 2007
263
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Trunk Group Assign window.
5. Either a VDN or split can be specified to display the trunk group or groups assigned to it.
264
Administration
July 2007
Custom or designer reports cannot be created from the trunk group members report.
The link to the Communication Manager system must be active in order to run this report.
Permissions
To run a trunk group members report, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and all affected trunk
groups.
Administration
July 2007
265
6. In the Trunk Groups: field, enter the numbers or names of the trunk groups that are to be
used in the report.
Multiple trunk groups must be separated by a semicolon (;).
7. In the Destination group, select the output option of the report:
Print Report on: - Sends the report to the printer that is specified in the associated
field. To change the specified printer, select the Select printer button located on the
right side of this group.
8. Select OK.
Supervisor runs the report and sends it to the specified destination.
VDN-to-vector assignments
A Vector Directory Number (VDN) is an extension number that enables incoming calls to be
connected to a vector for processing. The VDN by itself may be dialed to access the vector from
any extension that is connected to the switch. Initial assignment of a VDN to a vector is done on
the Communication Manager system, but can later be changed using CMS or Supervisor.
This section contains the following procedures:
266
Administration
July 2007
VDN-to-vector assignments
You cannot exit the VDN-to-vector assignment window until Supervisor receives a
response to the requested change.
Calls that are already in vector processing are not affected by a VDN-to-vector change.
Changing the VDN-to-vector assignment affects the next call that enters the VDN.
VDN-to-vector assignment changes that are scheduled should either be grouped together
in a timetable or individually scheduled so that one assignment completes before the next
assignment change request is scheduled.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view VDN-to-vector assignments, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and for all affected
VDNs and vectors.
To modify VDN-to-vector assignments, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires write permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and for all affect
VDNs and vectors.
Administration
July 2007
267
Steps
To view all current VDN-to-vector assignments:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD for which VDN-to-vector assignments are to be viewed.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Assignments.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Assignments window.
268
Administration
July 2007
VDN-to-vector assignments
Steps
To list the VDNs that are associated with a specific vector:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the vector resides.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Assignments.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Assignments window.
Administration
July 2007
269
Steps
To modify the assignment of a VDN to a vector:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the VDNs and vectors reside.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Assignments.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Assignments window.
5. In the VDNs: field, enter the name or number of the VDN that is to be reassigned.
6. Select Actions > Find one from the menu bar.
Supervisor displays the vector to which this VDN is currently assigned in the Vector: field.
7. In the Vector: field, enter the new vector for the specified VDN.
8. Select Actions > Modify from the menu bar.
The status bar displays a Successful message once the operation completes.
270
Administration
July 2007
When installed, CMS sets all service-level increments to 0 by default. This causes all calls
to appear in the first increment on the VDN call profile report.
Service-level increments can only be used to categorize a call to a maximum limit of 999
seconds.
The number of seconds for the second through the ninth increment must be at least 1
second greater than the number of seconds in the previous increment. For example, if the
second increment covers the range of 5 to 10 seconds, the maximum value in the third
increment must be set to 11 or greater.
Making changes to the service level field after data was collected with another service
level value causes reports to give inaccurate data for the Percent within Service Level
value. If you must change the service level, it is best to change the value at midnight on
the first day of a month so that data for the entire month is gathered using the same
service level value.
Administration
July 2007
271
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view a VDN call profile, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires
read permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and all affected VDNs.
To add, delete, or change a VDN call profile, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires write permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and all
affected VDNs.
Steps
To add a VDN call profile:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the VDN call profile will be added.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Call Profile Setup.
272
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Call Profile Setup window.
5. In the VDNs: field, enter the name or number of the VDN which will have a new call profile.
6. In the Acceptable service level: field, enter the maximum number of seconds in which a
VDN call should be addressed.
This value can range from 0 to 3600. However, the value should be no larger than the number
of seconds in the intrahour interval that is set on
CMS, for example, 1800 for a half-hour intrahour interval or 3600 for an hour-long intrahour
interval.
7. In each Service level increments (seconds): field, enter a progressively larger number
of seconds in each to field.
The following example shows how an administrator might set up a VDN call profile:
The Acceptable service level: field, is set to 1800 seconds to correspond with the
intrahour interval that is used on the CMS server.
Inc 1 is set to a range of 0 to 5 seconds. Inc 2 ranges is set to a range of 5 to 15
seconds. If the call is not resolved, CMS continues to process the call through the other
service-level increments until Inc 10. The Inc 10 service-level increment is used in this
example for those calls that extend beyond 360 seconds. If a call is not addressed after
the acceptable service level of 1800 seconds, the call is then tracked in a different CMS
database category.
Administration
July 2007
273
Steps
To view an existing VDN call profile:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the VDN call profile will be added.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Call Profile Setup.
274
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Call Profile Setup window.
5. In the VDNs: field, enter the name or number of the VDN for which the associated call
profile is to be viewed.
6. Select Actions > Find one from the menu bar.
Supervisor populates the remaining fields on the VDN Call Profile Setup window with the
call profile settings for this VDN. If no call profile has been created for this VDN, the
Service level increments (seconds): values are set to 0.
Administration
July 2007
275
Steps
To modifying an existing VDN call profile:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the VDN call profile will be modified.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Call Profile Setup.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Call Profile Setup window.
5. In the VDNs: field, enter the name or number of the VDN for which the associated call
profile is to be modified.
6. Select Actions > Find one from the menu bar.
Supervisor populates the remaining fields on the VDN Call Profile Setup window with the
call profile settings for this VDN. If no call profile has been created for this VDN, the
Service level increments (seconds): values are set to 0.
7. Enter new values in the appropriate fields:
276
Administration
July 2007
Enter a new value in the Acceptable service level field to match the intrahour interval
that is set on the CMS server.
Enter new ranges of time in the Service level increments (seconds): fields as
needed.
Steps
To delete an existing VDN call profile:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the VDN call profile will be deleted.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Call Profile Setup.
Administration
July 2007
277
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Call Profile Setup window.
5. In the VDNs: field, enter the name or number of the VDN for which the associated call
profile is to be deleted.
6. Select Actions > Find one from the menu bar.
Supervisor displays the call profile data for the selected VDN in the Acceptable service
level: and Service level increments (seconds): fields.
7. Select Actions > Delete from the menu bar.
The status bar displays a Successful message when the operation completes.
Trunk group
VDN
VDN name
Vector
Vector name
278
Administration
July 2007
A vector may appear in a report even if it is not associated with a trunk group or VDN.
A vector may appear in a report even if it does not contain any steps.
A go to vector step can cause a trunk group or VDN to carry calls to another vector to
which the VDN being used is not assigned. Trunk groups and VDNs that carry calls to a
secondary vector in this manner do not appear in the vector configuration report for those
secondary vectors.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view a vector configuration report, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Call Center Administration subsystem and all vectors to
be listed on the report. Permissions are not required for the trunk groups and VDNs that
are associated with the specified vectors.
Administration
July 2007
279
Steps
To run a vector configuration report:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Call Center Administration.
Supervisor displays the Call Center Administration window.
6. In the Vectors: field, enter the name or number of the vector for which the report will be
run.
Multiple vectors can be entered in this field but must be separated by a semicolon (;).
7. In the Destination group, select the output option of the report:
280
Administration
July 2007
Print Report on: - Sends the report to the printer that is specified in the associated
field. To change the specified printer, select the Select printer button located on the
right side of this group.
8. Select OK.
Supervisor runs the report and sends it to the specified destination.
Administration
July 2007
281
282
Administration
July 2007
Agent
Split/skill
Trunk group
VDN
Vector
Data Collection
Administration
July 2007
283
About exceptions
An exception is a type of activity in the ACD that falls outside the limits that have been defined
and could indicate unacceptable performance. Exceptions are gathered on agents, splits/skills,
trunk groups, VDNs, vectors, and unusual events such as Malicious Call Trace and disruptions
in data collection. This chapter describes the operations, prerequisites, and rules for
administering exceptions and the different types of exception reports that are available.
You can administer exceptions and generate reports for VDNs and vectors if your company has
purchased the Call Vectoring feature.
You can administer exceptions and generate reports for skills if your company has purchased
the Expert Agent Selection (EAS) feature.
This section includes the following topics:
Types of Exceptions
An exception can be one of three types:
Peg count
Agent timed
284
Administration
July 2007
About exceptions
Notification
The status bar of the Supervisor Controller window shows the current exception total for both
the peg count and time exceptions. This exception total is for all of the ACDs for which you have
permission to view exceptions. The exception count is cleared at the end of each interval and
can display a maximum number of 9999.
The PC on which Supervisor is running is, by default, configured to beep each time an
exception occurs. Changing this setting can be done by selecting Options > General on the
Supervisor menu bar.
Administration
July 2007
285
Exception capacities
CMS requires that storage space be defined on the server for the purpose of recording the
activities of the contact center. The recording of exceptions also uses this storage space. The
following items provide information on the limits for recording exceptions:
CMS can store a maximum of 2000 exception records of each element on all ACDs.
Therefore, your contact center can store up to 2000 agent, 2000 split/skill, 2000 trunk
group, 2000 VDN, and 2000 vector exception records across all ACDs.
Exception retrieval capacity is the number of days in the past for which you can retrieve
exceptions. This is determined by the following criteria:
- The number of exception records that are allocated for storage in the Data Storage
operation in the System Setup window. The maximum number of exception records of
each entity that can be stored is 2000 across all ACDs.
- The frequency with which exceptions are recorded each day. For example, if you
allocate storage for 1000 exception records and approximately 100 exceptions occur
each day, you can save exception records for nearly 10 days.
If an ACD Group is selected as the current ACD in the Exceptions window, only those
operations that are valid for the ACD Group will appear in the Operations: list.
286
The time limit for timed exceptions must be between 0 to 28800 seconds.
If a time limit is entered for an activity, an occurrence threshold for that activity must also
be entered.
When an exception is made active, CMS starts checking for the exception immediately as
long as data collection is activated.
When at least one exception is added to an entity, any future additions must be made by
using the Modify item on the Action menu.
When exceptions are being modified, the Find one menu item should always be used to
retrieve the current settings for the exception before any changes are made.
Administration
July 2007
Permissions
The default setting for most exceptions is off. However, the following exceptions are
always active and cannot be stopped:
- Malicious call trace
- Data collection disruptions
- Audio difficulty
- Agent attempts to log in with more than one login ID
Permissions
The following table describes the permission settings that are required in order for a user to
access exception information:
Does the user have read
permission for the
Exceptions feature?
and exceptions
permission for splits/skills,
trunk groups, ACDs,
vectors, and VDNs?
yes
yes
Exception reports
Messages in the
Real-Time Exception Log
Real-time notification of
exceptions
yes
no
Exceptions reports
no
yes
Real-time notification of
exceptions
no
no
No exceptions features
available to this user
Setting the exception permissions for these entities can be done through Tools > User
Permissions on the Supervisor Controller window.
Other permissions
To set up or change the method in which the system checks for exceptions, the user ID used to
log in to this Supervisor session requires the write permission for the Exceptions feature.
To be notified of a malicious call exception, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires the exception permission for the appropriate contact center entity.
Administration
July 2007
287
Exception notification
An exception notification is a beep that is sounded by Supervisor when an exception is
encountered. By default, this occurs when the user who is currently logged in to Supervisor has
the exceptions permission for the entity on which the exception occurred. If you do not want
Supervisor to beep when an exception occurs, follow the procedure in this section.
This section contains the following topic:
Steps
To change the exception notification:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > Options.
Supervisor displays the Options window.
288
To activate exception notification, place a check mark in the Use Sound check box.
To turn off exception notification, remove the check mark in the Use Sound check box.
Administration
July 2007
Agent exceptions
4. Select OK.
Agent exceptions
Agent exceptions can occur for many different activities in relation to an agent. These can
include the amount of time on a call or in a work state, the number of calls that an agent has in
queue, and other activities. This section provides the procedure for configuring if and when
these exceptions are checked by CMS.
This section contains the following topics:
Agent exceptions are assigned per split/skill and not for each agent. When an agent logs
into a split/skill, any exceptions that are configured for that split/skill are applied to the
agent.
The agent exceptions record for a split/skill are not created by default in the CMS database
when the split/skill is created. If a split/skill does not have agent exceptions, an Add action
must be taken to create the associated agent exceptions record.
Administration
July 2007
289
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view agent exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires
read permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all affected splits/skills as well as the
exceptions permission for the affected splits/skills.
To add, delete, or modify agent exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires write permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all affected split/skills
as well as the exceptions permission for the affected splits/skills.
Steps
To add agent exceptions for a split/skill:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions on the menu bar.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD for the split/skill where agent exceptions are to be
created.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Agent Exceptions.
Note:
290
Note:
If you need to add agent exceptions for AUX reason codes 10 through 99, select
the appropriate operation:
Administration
July 2007
Agent exceptions
This window appears with all fields blank when first opened.
Note:
Note:
This is a scrolling dialog box that contains more exceptions than those shown in
the above graphic. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the dialog box to view
the other exceptions.
5. In the Split(s)/Skill(s): field, enter the name or number of the split/skill for which an agent
exceptions configuration is to be created.
The Split(s)/Skill(s): field can accept multiple entries. Each entry must be separated by a
semicolon (;).
6. Perform the following actions in the specified fields for each Exception Type that you want
to monitor:
Administration
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception and allow it to
run and adhere to the parameters that are given in the other fields. Leaving this check
box blank disables the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
July 2007
291
Time Limit - Enter the time limit in seconds (0 to 28800) for those exception types that
use a time limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an
activity depending on the type of exception. If this limit is surpassed, CMS counts this
activity and compares it against the Threshold field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
7. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been entered, select Actions > Add
from the menu bar.
The exception configuration data will be saved for this split/skill and the status bar displays
a Successful message.
Steps
To modify an existing agent exception configuration:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the split/skill to modify for agent exceptions
resides.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Agent Exceptions.
292
Administration
July 2007
Agent exceptions
Note:
Note:
If you need to add agent exceptions for AUX reason codes 10 through 99, select
the appropriate operation:
- Agent Exceptions Reason Codes 0-49
- Agent Exceptions Reason Codes 50-99
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Agent Exceptions Administration window.
Note:
Note:
This is a scrolling dialog that contains more exceptions than those shown in the
above graphic. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the dialog to view the other
exceptions.
5. In the Split(s)/Skill(s): field, enter the name or number of the split/skill for which the agent
exceptions configuration is to be modified.
Administration
July 2007
293
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception and allow it to
run and adhere to the parameters that are given in the other fields. Leaving this check
box blank disables the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
Time Limit - Enter the time limit in seconds (0 to 28800) for those exception types that
use a time limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an
activity depending on the type of exception. If this limit is surpassed, CMS counts this
activity and compares it against the Threshold field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
8. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been modified, select Actions >
Modify from the menu bar.
Supervisor updates the data for this split/skill and displays a Successful message in the
status bar.
294
Administration
July 2007
Agent exceptions
Steps
To delete agent exceptions:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD on which the split/skill to delete resides.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Agent Exceptions.
Note:
Note:
If you need to add agent exceptions for AUX reason codes 10 through 99, select
the appropriate operation:
- Agent Exceptions Reason Codes 0-49
- Agent Exceptions Reason Codes 50-99
Administration
July 2007
295
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Agent Exceptions Administration window.
Note:
Note:
This is a scrolling dialog that contains more exceptions than those shown in the
above graphic. Use the scroll bar on the right side of the dialog to view the other
exceptions.
5. In the Split(s)/Skill(s): field, enter the name or number of the split/skill for which an agent
exceptions configuration is to be deleted.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
Supervisor locates the agent exception configuration for the specified split/skill and
displays the data in the appropriate fields. If exception configuration data cannot be found,
the status bar displays 0 matches found.
To return all splits/skills, leave the Split(s):/Skill(s): field blank before performing the Find
one action. Supervisor will return all split(s)/skill(s) for which you have the read
permission. You can then use the Next and Previous menu actions to cycle through the
splits/skills.
7. From the menu bar, select Actions > Delete.
Supervisor deletes the agent exception configuration for this split/skill from the CMS
database and displays a Successful message in the status bar.
296
Administration
July 2007
Agent exceptions
Definition
Time available
Administration
July 2007
297
298
Login Identification
The maximum time that any call waits in the direct agent
queue.
Administration
July 2007
Agent exceptions
Number of external
outbound ACW calls/agent
(maximum)
The exceptions must have occurred at some point. Otherwise, the report is blank.
Active exceptions must be specified in the input window so that they are included in the
report.
Administration
July 2007
299
Steps
To run the agent exceptions report:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
300
Administration
July 2007
Agent exceptions
6. In the Date: field, specify the date for the report in one of the following date formats:
Enter the relative date, for example, 0 for today, -1 for yesterday, or -7 for one week
ago.
Enter a relative date range, for example, -9-0 causes the report to display data for the
past ten days including today.
Time - The report results are sorted by the time that the exceptions occurred.
10. In the Exceptions: field, select one or more exceptions to include in the report.
Select only those exceptions that are or have been activated during the date specified. If
you select exceptions that have not been active during the date specified, the report does
not display any data in the report.
11. In the Destination group, select the output option of the report:
Print Report on: - Sends the report to the printer that is specified in the associated
field. To change the specified printer, select the Select printer button located on the
right side of this group.
Administration
July 2007
301
Split/skill exceptions
Using split/skill exceptions can help identify those splits/skills that need to be adjusted to
achieve more efficiency in the contact center.
Split/skill exceptions can assist you in the identification of problems in the following areas:
The length of time that calls wait for different handling options
The number of calls that are directed through different handling options
The average speed with which the calls are being answered
302
Administration
July 2007
Split/skill exceptions
To administer exceptions for skills, your company must have purchased Expert Agent
Selection (EAS). However, this feature is not needed to administer exceptions for splits.
The split/skill exceptions configuration is not created by default in the CMS database when
the split/skill is created. If a split/skill does not have an exceptions configuration, an Add
action must be taken to create it.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view split/skill exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires
read permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all affected splits/skills as well as the
exceptions permission for all affected splits/skills.
To add, delete, or modify split/skill exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires write permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all affected splits/
skills as well as the exceptions permission for all affected splits/skills
Administration
July 2007
303
Steps
To add a split/skill exception configuration:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the split/skill to receive the new exception
configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Split/Skill Exceptions.
304
Administration
July 2007
Split/skill exceptions
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Split/Skill Exception Administration window.
5. In the Split(s)/Skill(s): field, enter the name or number of the split/skill for which an
exceptions configuration is to be created.
6. For each Exception Type that should be monitored, the following fields must be
configured:
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception allowing it to run
and adhere to the parameters given in the other fields. Leaving this check box blank
will disable the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
Time Limit - Set the time limit in seconds (0-28800) for exception types that use a time
limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an activity. If
this limit is surpassed, CMS will count this activity and compare it against the
Threshold field. This field is requires an entry and cannot be left blank.
Threshold - Enter the number of acceptable occurrences of this activity (0-999). Any
occurrences beyond this number will generate an exception. If CMS should create an
exception on the very first instance, enter 0 in this field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
Administration
July 2007
305
7. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been entered, select Actions > Add
from the menu bar.
Supervisor saves the data for this split/skill and the status bar displays a Successful
message.
Steps
To modify a split/skill exception configuration:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the split/skill and its exception
configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Split/Skill Exceptions.
306
Administration
July 2007
Split/skill exceptions
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Split/Skill Exception Administration window.
5. In the Split(s)/Skill(s): field, enter the name or number of the split/skill for which its
exceptions configuration is to be modified.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
Supervisor locates the exception configuration for the specified split/skill and the displays
the data in the appropriate fields. If exception configuration data cannot be found, the
status bar displays 0 matches found.
To have all splits/skills returned in this step, leave the Split(s):/Skill(s): field blank before
performing the Find one action. Supervisor will return all split(s)/skill(s) for which you have
the read permission. You can then use the Next and Previous menu actions to cycle
through the splits/skills.
7. Make the necessary changes in the following fields for each Exception Type that requires
modification:
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception allowing it to run
and adhere to the parameters given in the other fields. Leaving this check box blank
will disable the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
Time Limit - Set the time limit in seconds (0-28800) for exception types that use a time
limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an activity. If
Administration
July 2007
307
this limit is surpassed, CMS will count this activity and compare it against the
Threshold field. This field is requires an entry and cannot be left blank.
Threshold - Enter the number of acceptable occurrences of this activity (0-999). Any
occurrences beyond this number will generate an exception. If CMS should create an
exception on the very first instance, enter 0 in this field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
8. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been entered, select Actions >
Modify from the menu bar.
Supervisor saves the data for this split/skill and the status bar displays a Successful
message.
Steps
To delete a split/skill exception configuration:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the split/skill and its exception
configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Split/Skill Exceptions.
308
Administration
July 2007
Split/skill exceptions
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Split/Skill Exception Administration window.
5. In the Split(s)/Skill(s): field, enter the name or number of the split/skill for which the
exception configuration is to be deleted.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
Supervisor locates the exception configuration for the specified split/skill and the displays
the data in the appropriate fields. If exception configuration data cannot be found, the
status bar displays 0 matches found.
To have all splits/skills returned in this step, leave the Split(s):/Skill(s): field blank before
performing the Find one action. Supervisor will return all split(s)/skill(s) for which you have
the read permission. You can then use the Next and Previous menu actions to cycle
through the splits/skills.
7. From the menu bar, select Actions > Delete.
Supervisor deletes the exception configuration for this split/skill from the CMS database
and a displays a Successful message in the status bar.
Administration
July 2007
309
310
In this field...
Number intraflowed-out
calls
Number interflowed-out
calls
Administration
July 2007
Split/skill exceptions
The exceptions must have occurred at some point. Otherwise, the report is blank.
Active exceptions must be specified in the input window so that they are included in the
report.
The user ID used to run the report must have the read permission for the Exceptions
subsystem and the affected splits/skills as well as the exceptions permission for all
affected splits/skills.
Administration
July 2007
311
Steps
To run the split/skill exceptions report:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
312
Administration
July 2007
Split/skill exceptions
6. In the Date: field, specify the date for which you want to view the report. Entry of the date
can be done through the following methods:
Enter the relative day; for example, 0 for today, -1 for yesterday, or -7 for one week
ago.
Enter a relative range; for example, -9-0 causes the report to display data for the past
ten days including today.
Multiple splits/skills can be entered in this field, but must be separated by a semicolon (;).
This is a required field.
8. In the Order by: field, select one of the following sorting options:
Time - The report results are sorted by the time the exceptions occurred.
9. In the Exceptions: field, select one or more exceptions to include in the report.
Only those exceptions that have been activated in the past should be selected. Selecting
exceptions that have not been activated will not return any data in the report.
10. In Destination group, select one of the following output options:
Print Report on: - The report is sent to the specified printer. Any printer available to
the PC can be used and selected through the button at the right of the field.
Administration
July 2007
313
314
Administration
July 2007
An Audio Difficulty exception is associated with each trunk group. This exception is always
provided for all Communication Manager systems that support event counts and it cannot
be disabled. For this reason, this exception is not available on the Trunk Group
Exception Administration window.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view trunk group exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all affected trunk groups as
well as the exceptions permission for all affected trunk groups.
To add, delete, or change trunk group exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this
Supervisor session requires write permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all
affected trunk groups as well as the exceptions permission for all affected trunk groups.
Administration
July 2007
315
Steps
To add exceptions for a trunk group:
1. From the Controller Window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD for the trunk group that will receive the new exceptions
configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Trunk Group Exceptions.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Trunk Group Exception Administration window.
5. In the Trunk groups: field, enter the name or number of the trunk group for which an
exceptions configuration is to be created.
316
Administration
July 2007
6. For each Exception Type that should be monitored, the following fields must be
configured:
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception allowing it to run
and adhere to the parameters given in the other fields. Leaving this check box blank
will disable the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
Time Limit - Set the time limit in seconds (0-28800) for exception types that use a time
limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an activity. If
this limit is surpassed, CMS will count this activity and compare it against the
Threshold field. This field is requires an entry and cannot be left blank.
Threshold - Enter the number of acceptable occurrences of this activity (0-999). Any
occurrences beyond this number will generate an exception. If CMS should create an
exception on the very first instance, enter 0 in this field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
7. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been entered, select Actions > Add
from the menu bar.
Supervisor saves the data for this trunk group and the status bar displays a Successful
message.
Administration
July 2007
317
Steps
To modify trunk group exceptions:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the trunk group and its exception
configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Trunk Group Exceptions.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Trunk Group Exception Administration window.
5. In the Trunk groups: field, enter the name or number of the trunk group for which
exception configuration is to be modified.
318
Administration
July 2007
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception allowing it to run
and adhere to the parameters given in the other fields. Leaving this check box blank
will disable the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
Time Limit - Set the time limit in seconds (0-28800) for exception types that use a time
limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an activity. If
this limit is surpassed, CMS will count this activity and compare it against the
Threshold field. This field is requires an entry and cannot be left blank.
Threshold - Enter the number of acceptable occurrences of this activity (0-999). Any
occurrences beyond this number will generate an exception. If CMS should create an
exception on the very first instance, enter 0 in this field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
8. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been entered, select Actions >
Modify from the menu bar.
Supervisor updates the data for this trunk group and the status bar displays a Successful
message.
Administration
July 2007
319
Steps
To delete a trunk group exception configuration:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the trunk group and its exception
configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Trunk Group Exceptions.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Trunk Group Exception Administration window.
5. In the Trunk groups: field, enter the name or number of the trunk group for which the
exception configuration is to be deleted.
320
Administration
July 2007
Number of trunks
maintenance busy
Administration
July 2007
321
The exceptions must have occurred at some point. Otherwise, the report is blank.
Active exceptions must be specified in the input window so that they are included in the
report.
Steps
To run the trunk group exceptions report:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
322
Administration
July 2007
6. In the Date: field, specify the date to view for the report. Entry of the date can be done
through the following methods:
Enter the relative day; for example, 0 for today, -1 for yesterday, or -7 for one week
ago.
Enter a relative range; for example, -9-0 causes the report to display data for the past
ten days including today.
Multiple trunk groups can be entered in this field, but must be separated by a semicolon
(;).
This is a required field.
8. In the Order by: field, select one of the following sorting options:
Administration
Trunk Group - The report results are sorted by trunk group number.
July 2007
323
Time - The report results are sorted by the time the exceptions occurred.
9. In the Exceptions: field, select one or more exceptions to include in the report.
Select only those exceptions that are or have been activated during the date specified. If
you select exceptions that have not been active during the date specified, the report does
not display any data in the report.
Audio difficulty is a trunk group exception that can be requested on a report even though
it cannot be administered in trunk group exception operations.
10. In Destination group, select one of the following output options:
Print Report on: - The report is sent to the specified printer. Any printer available to
the PC can be used and selected through the button at the right of the field.
VDN exceptions
Use Vector Directory Number (VDN) exceptions to assist in the identification of problems in the
following areas:
324
The number of calls that reach specific states, such as disconnected, busy, and
abandoned
Administration
July 2007
VDN exceptions
The number of calls that are routed in or out of the VDN and if they are successful
To administer VDN exceptions, your company must have purchased and installed the Call
Vectoring feature.
Because of the routing that is permitted by the go to vector command, the Time in
vector exception may include the time that a call spends in more than one vector.
CMS begins to monitor for VDN exceptions when a call connects to the VDN and stops
when the call is disconnected, sent to another VDN, sent to an external destination, or
transferred. The call remains connected to the VDN if one of the following circumstances is
encountered:
- The call routes to another vector through a go to vector step.
- The call is sent through a route to or adjunct routing step to a non-VDN
extension that is internal to the local Communication Manager system.
If a large number of VDNs exist in the Dictionary (over 2000), there can be lengthy waiting
periods when you browse for VDNs through Supervisor.
Some exception types require that an appropriate step exists in the vector to which the
VDN is assigned. For example, to get exceptions on unsuccessful Look Ahead
Interflow attempts, the vector for the VDN must have at least one route to step that
routes calls to a vector on a remote switch.
Administration
July 2007
325
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view VDN exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires
read permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all affected VDNs as well as the
exceptions permission for all affected VDNs.
To add, delete, or change VDN exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires write permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all affected VDNs as
well as the exceptions permissions for all affected VDNs.
Steps
To add an exceptions configuration to a VDN:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the VDN that will receive the new
exceptions configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Exceptions.
326
Administration
July 2007
VDN exceptions
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Exception Administration window.
5. In the VDNs: field, enter the name or number of the VDN for which the exceptions
configuration is to be created.
6. For each Exception Type that should be monitored, the following fields must be
configured:
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception allowing it to run
and adhere to the parameters given in the other fields. Leaving this check box blank
will disable the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
Time Limit - Set the time limit in seconds (0-28800) for exception types that use a time
limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an activity. If
this limit is surpassed, CMS will count this activity and compare it against the
Threshold field. This field is requires an entry and cannot be left blank.
Threshold - Enter the number of acceptable occurrences of this activity (0-999). Any
occurrences beyond this number will generate an exception. If CMS should create an
exception on the very first instance, enter 0 in this field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
Administration
July 2007
327
7. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been entered, select Actions > Add
from the menu bar.
Supervisor saves the data for this VDN exception configuration and the status bar displays
a Successful message.
Steps
To modify VDN exceptions:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the VDN and its exception configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Exceptions.
328
Administration
July 2007
VDN exceptions
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Exception Administration window.
5. In the VDNs: field, enter the name or number of the VDN for which exception configuration
is to be modified.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
Supervisor locates the exception configuration data for the specified VDN and displays it in
the appropriate fields. If exception configuration data cannot be found for this VDN, the
status bar displays 0 matches found.
To have all VDNs returned in this step, leave the VDNs: field blank before performing the
Find one action. Supervisor will return all VDNs for which you have the read permission.
You can then use the Next and Previous menu actions to cycle through the VDNs.
7. For each Exception Type that should be monitored, the following fields must be
configured:
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception allowing it to run
and adhere to the parameters given in the other fields. Leaving this check box blank
will disable the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
Time Limit - Set the time limit in seconds (0-28800) for exception types that use a time
limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an activity. If
this limit is surpassed, CMS will count this activity and compare it against the
Threshold field. This field is requires an entry and cannot be left blank.
Administration
July 2007
329
Threshold - Enter the number of acceptable occurrences of this activity (0-999). Any
occurrences beyond this number will generate an exception. If CMS should create an
exception on the very first instance, enter 0 in this field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
8. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been entered, select Actions >
Modify from the menu bar.
Supervisor updates the exception configuration data for this VDN and the status bar
displays a Successful message.
Steps
To delete a VDN exception configuration:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the VDN and its exception configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight VDN Exceptions.
330
Administration
July 2007
VDN exceptions
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the VDN Exception Administration window.
5. In the VDNs: field, enter the name or number of the VDN for which the exception
configuration is to be deleted.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
Supervisor locates the exception configuration for the specified VDN and the data displays
in the appropriate fields. If exception configuration data cannot be found, the status bar
displays 0 matches found.
To have all VDNs returned through this step, leave the VDNs: field blank. Supervisor
displays the total number of matches in the status bar. The VDNs can then be navigated
by using the Next and Previous actions.
7. From the menu bar, select Actions > Delete.
Supervisor deletes the exception configuration for this VDN from the CMS database and
displays a Successful message in the status bar.
Administration
July 2007
331
332
In this field...
Time in Vector
Number of calls
disconnected
Administration
July 2007
VDN exceptions
In this field...
Number of unsuccessful
look ahead interflow
attempts
Number of unsuccessful
adjunct routing attempts
The exceptions must have occurred at some point. Otherwise, the report is blank.
Active exceptions must be specified in the input window so that they are included in the
report.
Administration
July 2007
333
Steps
To run the VDN exceptions report:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
334
Administration
July 2007
VDN exceptions
6. In the Date: field, specify the date to view for the report. Entry of the date can be done
through the following methods:
Enter the relative day; for example, 0 for today, -1 for yesterday, or -7 for one week
ago.
Enter a relative range; for example, -9-0 causes the report to display data for the past
ten days including today.
Multiple VDNs can be entered in this field, but must be separated by a semicolon (;). This
is a required field.
8. In the Order by: field, select one of the following sorting options:
Time - The report results are sorted by the time the exceptions occurred.
9. In the Exceptions: field, select one or more exceptions to include in the report.
Select only those exceptions that have been activated at some point in the past. Selecting
exceptions that have not been activated will not return any data in the report.
10. In Destination group, select one of the following output options:
Print Report on: - The report is sent to the specified printer. Any printer available to
the PC can be used and selected through the button at the right of the field.
Administration
July 2007
335
Vector exceptions
When vector exceptions are configured and activated, CMS monitors for these exceptions when
a call enters the vector and continues monitoring until the call connects to an agent, is
abandoned, or is routed to another destination.
Vector exceptions can assist in the identification of problems in the following areas:
The number of calls that are abandoned, disconnected, or forced busy while in the vector
336
Administration
July 2007
Vector exceptions
Calls may generate some exceptions for a vector, even after the vector has given routing
control to the adjunct by an adjunct routing vector command.
Some exception types require that an appropriate step exists in the vector. For example, to
get exceptions on unsuccessful Look Ahead Interflow attempts, the vector must have at
least one route to step which routes calls to a remote Communication Manager system.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view vector exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires
read permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all affected vectors as well as the
exceptions permission for the affected vectors.
To add, delete, or change vector exceptions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires write permission for the Exceptions subsystem and all affected vectors as
well as the exceptions permission for the affected vectors.
Administration
July 2007
337
Steps
To add a vector exception configuration:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the vector that will receive the new
exceptions configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Vector Exceptions.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Vector Exception Administration window.
5. In the Vectors: field, enter the name or number of the vector for which an exceptions
configuration is to be created.
6. For each Exception Type that should be monitored, the following fields must be
configured:
338
Administration
July 2007
Vector exceptions
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception allowing it to run
and adhere to the parameters given in the other fields. Leaving this check box blank
will disable the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
Time Limit - Set the time limit in seconds (0-28800) for exception types that use a time
limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an activity. If
this limit is surpassed, CMS will count this activity and compare it against the
Threshold field. This field is requires an entry and cannot be left blank.
Threshold - Enter the number of acceptable occurrences of this activity (0-999). Any
occurrences beyond this number will generate an exception. If CMS should create an
exception on the very first instance, enter 0 in this field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
7. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been entered, select Actions > Add
from the menu bar.
Supervisor saves the data for this vector exception configuration and the displays a
Successful message in the status bar.
Steps
To modify vector exceptions:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
Administration
July 2007
339
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the vector and its exception configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Vector Exceptions.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Vector Exception Administration window.
5. In the Vectors: field, enter the name or number of the vector for which the exception
configuration is to be modified.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
Supervisor locates the agent exception configuration for the specified split/skill and
displays the data in the appropriate fields. If the exception configuration data cannot be
found, the status bar displays 0 matches found.
To have all vectors returned when performing this step, leave the Vectors: field blank
before performing the Find one action. Supervisor will return all vectors for which you
have the read permission. You can then use the Next and Previous menu actions to cycle
through the vectors.
7. For each Exception Type that should be monitored, the following fields must be
configured:
340
Active - Place a check mark in this check box to enable the exception allowing it to run
and adhere to the parameters given in the other fields. Leaving this check box blank
will disable the exception and CMS will not attempt to track the activity for this
exception.
Time Limit - Set the time limit in seconds (0-28800) for exception types that use a time
limit. This value is used as the minimum or maximum amount of time for an activity. If
this limit is surpassed, CMS will count this activity and compare it against the
Threshold field. This field is requires an entry and cannot be left blank.
Threshold - Enter the number of acceptable occurrences of this activity (0-999). Any
occurrences beyond this number will generate an exception. If CMS should create an
Administration
July 2007
Vector exceptions
exception on the very first instance, enter 0 in this field. This field requires an entry and
cannot be left blank.
8. When all necessary time limits and thresholds have been entered, select Actions >
Modify from the menu bar.
Supervisor updates the exception configuration data for this vector and the status bar
displays a Successful message.
Steps
To delete a vector exception configuration:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD that contains the vector and its exception configuration.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Vector Exceptions.
Administration
July 2007
341
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Vector Exception Administration window.
5. In the Vectors: field, enter the name or number of the vector for which the exception
configuration is to be deleted.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
Supervisor locates the agent exception configuration for the specified split/skill and
displays the data in the appropriate fields. If the exception configuration data cannot be
found, the status bar displays 0 matches found.
To have all vectors returned in this step, leave the Vectors: field blank before performing
the Find one action. Supervisor will return all vectors for which you have the read
permission. You can then use the Next and Previous menu actions to cycle through the
vectors.
7. From the menu bar, select Actions > Delete.
Supervisor deletes the exception configuration for this vector from the CMS database and
displays a Successful message in the status bar.
342
In this field...
Administration
July 2007
Vector exceptions
Number of calls
abandoned while in vector
Number of calls
disconnected
Number of unsuccessful
look ahead interflow
attempts
Number of unsuccessful
adjunct routing attempts
One or more vector exceptions must have been activated at some time in the past.
The exceptions must have occurred at some point. Otherwise, the report is blank.
Active exceptions must be specified in the input window so that they are included in the
report.
Administration
July 2007
343
Steps
To run an vector exceptions report:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
344
Administration
July 2007
Vector exceptions
6. In the Date: field, specify the date to view for the report. Entry of the date can be done
through the following methods:
Enter the relative day; for example, 0 for today, -1 for yesterday, or -7 for one week
ago.
Enter a relative range; for example, -9-0 causes the report to display data for the past
ten days including today.
Multiple vectors can be entered in this field, but must be separated by a semicolon (;).
This is a required field.
8. In the Order by: field, select one of the following sorting options:
Time - The report results are sorted by the time the exceptions occurred.
9. In the Exceptions: field, select one or more exceptions to include in the report.
The exceptions selected in this field should be those that have been activated at some
point in the past. Selecting exceptions that have not been activated will not return any data
in the report.
10. In Destination group, select one of the following output options:
Print Report on: - The report is sent to the specified printer. Any printer available to
the PC can be used and selected through the button at the right of the field.
Administration
July 2007
345
346
Exceptions must have occurred for the exception type that you want the report to cover.
Otherwise, the report is blank.
User IDs must have the exception permission for the ACD in order to be notified of a
link-down exception.
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To run the data collection exceptions report:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
Administration
July 2007
347
5. In the ACDs: field, select one or more ACDs for which you want to run the report.
This field accepts multiple values. Multiple ACDs must be separated by a semicolon (;).
6. In the Dates: field, enter the date the report will cover by using one of the following
methods:
Enter the related day; for example, 0 for today, -1 for yesterday, or -7 for one week
ago.
Enter a relative range; for example, -9-0 causes the report to display data for the past
ten days including today.
This field can accept multiple date values, but the dates must be separated by a semicolon
(;). This field is required.
7. In Destination group, select one of the following output options:
Print Report on: - The report is sent to the specified printer. Any printer available to
the PC can be used and selected through the button at the right of the field.
8. Select OK.
Supervisor sends the data collection exceptions report to the specified output method.
348
Administration
July 2007
The malicious call trace report is used to view detailed information on the occurrences of these
calls. The report shows the date and time when each call occurred, the agent who received the
call, and the involved split or skill. If the automatic number identification / station number
identification (ANI/SID) network feature has been purchased and implemented, the report also
shows where the call originated. This report is only available with Supervisor.
This section contains the following topics:
To view the malicious call trace report, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires the exception permission for the split/skill that received the malicious call.
Administration
July 2007
349
Steps
To run a malicious call trace report:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
6. In the Dates: field, enter the date the report will cover by using one of the following
methods:
350
Enter the related day; for example, 0 for today, -1 for yesterday, or -7 for one week
ago.
Administration
July 2007
Enter a relative range; for example, -9-0 causes the report to display data for the past
ten days including today.
This field can accept multiple date values, but the dates must be separated by a semicolon
(;). This field is required.
7. In Destination group, select one of the following output options:
Print Report on: - The report is sent to the specified printer. Any printer available to
the PC can be used and selected through the button at the right of the field.
8. Select OK.
Supervisor sends the malicious call trace report to the specified output method.
Administration
July 2007
351
When the log is first opened, the most recent exception is on the last line in the window. As
long as the window remains open, the log automatically scrolls to display each new
exception record. If the scroll bar is used to view the older records at the top of the log,
automatic scrolling for new exceptions stops until the user scrolls back to the bottom of the
log.
352
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To run the real-time exceptions log:
1. From the Controller window, select Commands > Exceptions.
Supervisor displays the Exceptions window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD for which exceptions will be shown.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Real-time Exception Log.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Real-Time Exception Log window.
Administration
July 2007
353
354
Administration
July 2007
Administration
July 2007
355
Important:
Any user ID (normal or administrator) given write access to the User Permission
feature will be able to alter their own permissions for all CMS subsystems.
The following table displays an example of permissions that would be necessary for a split
supervisor:
If the contact
center has one
split called...
And assigned to it
are...
Split 1
Split 1
Trunk groups 22 and 23
Dictionary
Exceptions
User data
In order for users to use Supervisor, they must first be created through the User Data feature.
Afterwards, users can use their assigned ID to log in through Supervisor and CMS. User IDs
should only be created for those persons who will be using Supervisor as a part of their job
duties in administering the contact center.
The User Data window is used for the following actions:
Administer the maximum number of open simultaneous windows allowed for a user ID.
Set the minimum refresh rate for real-time reports for a user ID.
356
Administration
July 2007
User data
Users added through the Sun Microsystems, Inc. Solaris system instead of the User Data
window will not be able to run CMS without assuming the role of a valid user by using the
su command. Solaris users will have a shell of /usr/bin/sh. The User Data window will
not display users that were created through Solaris.
Users added through the User Data window will automatically have CMS launch when
they log in. The shell for these users will be /usr/bin/cms.
The User Data window can be run through scripts and timetables.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure to be performed, the following permissions must be observed:
To display the User Data window and view user information, the user ID used to log in to
this Supervisor session requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify users through the User Data window, the user ID used to log in
to this Supervisor session requires write permission for the User Permissions sub
system.
Administration
July 2007
357
Steps
To add a CMS user ID:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
The Vector Access and VDN Access menu items are listed if the Call Vectoring feature
has been purchased.
2. In the ACD: field, select the ACD or ACD Group on which the user will be created.
The same user ID does not need to be created on each ACD. A user created on one ACD
can be given permissions to the other ACDs.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight User Data.
358
Administration
July 2007
User data
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions User Data window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the new user ID to be created. The user ID must adhere to the
following rules:
User IDs cannot contain certain diacritical, accented, special characters, or blanks (for
example, , , , |, ). If a user ID is entered with an invalid character, Supervisor
displays an error message.
Normal user - Select this type to designate those users whose job responsibilities do
not include maintenance, configuration, and updating of CMS.
This role of user has only the read permission for the following features:
- Agent Administration
- Custom Reports/Report Designer
- Dictionary
- Exceptions
Administration
July 2007
359
- Forecast
- Maintenance
- Reports
- Timetable
Administrator - Select this type to designate those users who job responsibilities
include maintenance, configuration, or updating of CMS. This user role is assigned
read and write permissions for all features.
Important:
Changing the role of the user after creation will not change any permissions
assigned to the user. All permission changes need to be done manually.
Important:
9. In the Maximum user window count (1-12): field, enter the number of windows that the
user may have open simultaneously. The default for this field is 4.
!
Important:
Important:
Allowing many users to have multiple windows open will consume more CMS
processor resources.
10. In the Minimum refresh rate (seconds): field, enter the number of seconds (3-600) in
which data for real-time reports is retrieved again from the database and displayed for this
user ID.
!
Important:
Important:
Faster refresh rates consume more CMS processor resources.
11. In the Login ACD: field, select the ACD which will be used to login this user ID. The user
can change the current ACD after logging in, but each time the user logs in, the current
ACD defaults to the value entered in this field.
If an ACD is selected in this field for log in and the user does not have any permissions for
it, Supervisor displays an error message.
This is a required field and cannot be left with the default value of (none).
12. Select Actions > Add from the menu bar.
The user ID is created on the ACD specified earlier in the User Permissions dialog box. If
the user ID already exists, Supervisor displays an Already exists message in the status
bar.
360
Administration
July 2007
User data
The default values in the User Data window should be cleared before attempting to
perform a Find one or List all action unless these values should be included in the
search.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure to be performed, the following permissions must be observed:
To display the User Data window and view user information, the user ID used to log in to
this Supervisor session requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify users through the User Data window, the user ID used to log in
to this Supervisor session requires write permission for the User Permissions sub
system.
Steps
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
The Vector Access and VDN Access menu items are listed if the Call Vectoring feature
has been purchased.
2. In the Operations: list, highlight User Data.
Administration
July 2007
361
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions User Data window.
List all - Selecting this item from the Action menu will display a secondary window
displaying all users whose settings match those in the fields of this window. If no
information is present in the fields, all users are displayed. This method is convenient
when the need arises to look for one or more user IDs.
Find one - Selecting this item from the Action menu will take the information currently
in all the fields of this dialog and query the database for users with matching settings.
For example, having a 6 in the Maximum user window count (1-12): field with all
other fields blank and selecting Find one will result in a search for all CMS users
having a 6 for their Maximum user window count. If multiple users are found, each
can be viewed by selecting the Next and Previous items under the Actions menu.
When using the Find one command, partial text strings are not supported in the
search. Therefore, to view the settings for a user ID, the complete name must be
entered in the User ID: field.
If multiple users are found using the Find one action, the Next action will not become
disabled at the last user, but instead cause the first user found to be displayed again.
362
Administration
July 2007
User data
If a user's login ACD is removed and the user tries to log into CMS, an acknowledgment
tells the user either to contact the CMS administrator or to change the login ACD.
Changing the login type for a user from Administration to Normal or vice versa does not
change the permissions for that user ID. Permissions must be changed manually.
Changes to maximum window count, minimum refresh rate, or default login ACD for a user
do not take effect until the user logs out and back in again.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure to be performed, the following permissions must be observed:
To display the User Data window and view user information, the user ID used to log in to
this Supervisor session requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify users through the User Data window, the user ID used to log in
to this Supervisor session requires write permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
Steps
To modify the settings for an existing CMS user:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
The Vector Access and VDN Access menu items are listed if the Call Vectoring feature
has been purchased.
2. In the Operations: list, highlight User Data.
Administration
July 2007
363
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions User Data window.
4. Clear all field default values by selecting Edit > Clear All from the menu bar.
5. In the Login type (select only one): field, select the login type for the user that will be
modified.
6. Enter the name of the user to modify in the User ID: field.
7. Select Actions > Find one.
The settings for the specified user ID will populate their associated fields.
If the user ID was not found, try selecting the other login type in the Login type (select
only one): field.
8. Modify the settings for this user as needed.
9. After all necessary modifications have been made, select Actions > Modify.
The settings for this user are updated and the status bar will display a Successful
message.
364
Administration
July 2007
User data
Deleting a user ID added through the User Data window of CMS will remove that ID and
its associated permissions from CMS and the Solaris system.
Deleting a user who had custom reports, designer reports, or timetables, will result in an
acknowledgment window asking if those items should be moved to your user ID. If they
are moved and there is a conflict between the assigned names, a prompt window will
appear allowing the moved items to be renamed. If not moved, any custom reports,
designer reports, and timetables will be deleted along with the user ID.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure to be performed, the following permissions must be observed:
To display the User Data window and view user information, the user ID used to log in to
this Supervisor session requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify users through the User Data window, the user ID used to log in
to this Supervisor session requires write permission for the User Permissions sub
system.
Steps
To delete an existing CMS user:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
The Vector Access and VDN Access menu items are listed if the Call Vectoring feature
has been purchased.
2. In the Operations: list, highlight User Data.
Administration
July 2007
365
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions User Data window.
366
Administration
July 2007
ACD access
ACD access
The ACD Access window is used to view and modify the user permissions for a selected real or
pseudo ACD. This window can also be used to turn exception notification on or off for a selected
ACD.
This section contains the following topics:
By default, a newly-created user is granted read, write, and exceptions permissions for all
real and pseudo ACDs.
User permissions for ACD access are stored separately from the user ID created through
the Adding a CMS user procedure. Because of this, user permissions for the ACD can be
deleted and modified without affecting the state of the user ID.
If the ACD permissions for a user are changed, the change does not take effect until the
user logs out and logs back in again.
If the read and write permissions are disabled for a user, then the user will not be able to
access any splits/skills, trunk groups, vectors, or VDNs in that ACD. If read is enabled and
write is disabled, the user will not be able to modify splits/skills, trunk groups, vectors, or
VDNs in that ACD.
If the permissions for the default login ACD of a user are removed, the user must have
another login ACD assigned.
A user must be created through the User Data window before any ACD permissions can
be assigned.
Users should only have the ACD permissions necessary to perform job duties. Assigning
only those necessary user permissions will ensure the best system performance.
Administration
July 2007
367
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view user permission settings in the ACD Access window, the user ID used to log in to
this Supervisor session requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify user permission settings in the ACD Access window, the user ID
used to log in to this Supervisor session requires write permission for the User
Permissions subsystem.
Steps
To add a user permission definition for an ACD:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
368
Administration
July 2007
ACD access
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions ACD Access window.
4. In the User ID: field, enter the ID of the user for whom to create an ACD permissions
definition.
This field is required.
5. In the ACD: field, enter the names or numbers for one or more ACDs that this user will be
able to access (real, pseudo, or group).
Multiple values in this field must be separated with a semicolon (;).
6. Place a check mark in the permissions that will be assigned to this user:
Read: - User can view but not modify information for the specified ACDs.
Write: - User can modify information on the specified ACDs. This permission requires
that the user also have the read permission.
7. After assigning the necessary permissions, select Actions > Add from the menu bar.
The ACD permissions for this user are saved.
It is possible to add permission definitions for multiple users at one time. To do so, enter
multiple CMS users in the User ID: field and separate them with semicolons (;). The
ACDs specified in the ACDs: field and the selected permissions are then created for these
user IDs when the Add action is performed.
Administration
July 2007
369
Steps
To view the ACD permission definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
4. In the User ID: field, enter the ID of the CMS user for which the permissions for ACDs are
to be viewed.
This field is required.
When searching for the user permissions definitions on specific ACDs, these ACDs can be
entered in the ACDs: field. Multiple entries must be separated by a semicolon (;).
370
Administration
July 2007
ACD access
Steps
To list all ACD permission definitions for all CMS users:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
Administration
July 2007
371
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions ACD Access window.
372
Administration
July 2007
ACD access
!
Important:
Important:
If the read permissions is denied for the ACD that the user logs into, that user will
no longer be able to log on. A new default login ACD must be set for the user.
Steps
To modify the ACD permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
Administration
July 2007
373
!
Important:
374
Important:
If the user permissions definition is deleted for the ACD that the user logs into,
that user will no longer be able to log on. A new default login ACD must be set for
the user. Deleting the permissions definition does not restrict the permissions for
the user, but actually deletes the user from the specified ACD. This action does
not affect the user ID created through the User Data feature.
Administration
July 2007
ACD access
Steps
To delete the ACD permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
4. In the User ID: field, enter the ID of the CMS user for which the permissions for ACDs are
to be modified.
When searching for the user permissions definitions on specific ACDs, these ACDs can be
entered in the ACDs: field. Multiple entries must be separated by a semicolon (;). These
entries can include real ACDs, pseudo-ACDs, or ACD Groups.
5. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
The status bar displays how many matching permission definitions are available. The
fields of this window display the user permissions definition for the first ACD.
If more than one ACD is returned, use the Next action to view the permission definitions
for the other ACDs.
Administration
July 2007
375
6. Once the correct permission definition is displayed in the window, select Actions > Delete
from the menu bar.
The ACD permissions definition for this user is deleted and the status bar displays a
Successful message.
7. Once the permissions have been changed to the necessary settings, select Actions >
Modify from the menu bar.
The user permissions definition for this ACD is updated and the status bar displays a
Successful message.
Feature access
The Feature Access window is used to view and modify the permissions available to a CMS
user ID for the following features:
Agent Administration
Custom Reports
Dictionary
Exceptions
Forecast
Maintenance
Reports
Timetable
User Permissions
UNIX System
The permissions assigned to a user will affect the appearance of the Supervisor Controller
window. For example, a user without permissions for the Dictionary feature will not have a
corresponding toolbar button on the Controller window.
Contents
This section contains the following topics:
376
Administration
July 2007
Feature access
Feature Access permissions cannot be modified for the cms and cmssvc user IDs. This
prevents a user with access to the User Permissions feature from disabling access to all
or part of CMS for the administrator or services personnel.
If the Feature Access permissions for a user are modified, the changes do not take effect
until the user logs off and back on again.
A user ID must be created through the User Data feature before that user can have
Feature Access permissions assigned.
Default Feature Access permissions are assigned when a user ID is created. The
Administrator type of user ID has permissions for all features. The Normal type of user
ID is given read permissions for all features except User Permissions, System Setup,
Call Center Administration, and Forecasting. User ID types are set through the User
Data feature.
Assigning a user the write permission for the User Permissions feature allows that user to
change permissions for all users.
A user ID cannot have write permissions without also having read permissions.
If a user does not have read permission for a feature, that feature will not be displayed as
a toolbar button or menu item in the Supervisor Controller window.
Assigning only the necessary access permissions ensures the best system performance.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the Feature Access window, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify settings through the Feature Access window, the user ID used
to log in to this Supervisor session requires write permission for the User Permissions
subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
377
Steps
To view the Feature Access permissions for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
378
Administration
July 2007
Feature access
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions Feature Access window.
Administration
July 2007
379
Steps
To list the Feature Access permissions for all CMS users:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
380
Administration
July 2007
Feature access
Steps
To modify Feature Access permissions for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
Administration
July 2007
381
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions Feature Access window.
Change the Read and Write permissions as necessary by placing or removing check
marks in the check boxes for each feature.
8. When the necessary changes have been made to the user feature permissions, select
Actions > Modify from the menu bar.
The feature access permissions for this user ID are updated and the status bar displays a
Successful message.
382
Administration
July 2007
Contents
This section contains the following topics:
If the assigned Main Menu Addition Access permission for a user is disabled, the custom
menu item will not be displayed on the CMS Main Menu for that user.
If a the Main Menu Addition Access permission is changed for a user, those changes will
not take effect until the user logs out and back in again.
A user ID must be created through the User Data feature before assignments or changes
can be made to that user ID through the Main Menu Addition Access feature.
Main Menu additions must be created through System Setup before these custom menu
items can be assigned to users.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view Main Menu Addition Access user configurations, the user ID used to log in to
CMS requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify Main Menu Addition Access user configurations, the user ID
used to log in to CMS requires write permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
383
Steps
To view the Main Menu Addition Access configuration for a user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
4. In the User IDs: field, enter a CMS user ID that has been previously defined through the
User Data feature.
This field can accept the entry of multiple users at one time. Multiple entries must be
separated by a semicolon (;).
384
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To list all Main Menu Addition Access configurations for CMS users:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
Administration
July 2007
385
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions Main Menu Addition Access window.
386
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To assign or modify a custom Main Menu item for a CMS users:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
4. In the User IDs: field, enter a CMS user ID that has been previously defined through the
User Data feature.
This field can accept the entry of multiple users at one time. Multiple entries must be
separated by a semicolon (;).
Administration
July 2007
387
Split/Skill access
This section provides the procedures for working with user permissions regarding splits/skills.
For users providing administration for splits/skills or running split/skill reports, it is necessary for
them to have the proper split/skill permissions to perform their job functions.
Split/skill exceptions notification is also configured through this interface. Users who are given
the Exceptions permission will be notified of split/skill exceptions when they occur.
This section contains the following topics:
388
Administration
July 2007
Split/Skill access
A CMS user ID must be created through the User Data feature before split/skill
permissions can be assigned.
When a new user ID is created through the User Data feature, split/skill permission
definitions for that user are not created. This is done to conserve disk space. When a split/
skill permissions definition does not exist for a user ID, CMS will deny read and write
access to splits/skills.
A user ID must first have permissions for the ACD on which the split/skill resides before
split/skill permissions can be assigned. If a user ID is assigned split/skill permissions and
does not have the appropriate ACD permissions, Supervisor displays an error message.
A user ID cannot be assigned the write permission without first having the read
permission.
Assigning only those permissions that are necessary for each user ID ensures the best
system performance.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view split/skill user permissions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify split/skill user permissions, the user ID used to log in to this
Supervisor session requires write permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
If a user does not have corresponding ACD permissions for the permissions set for them
on the split/skill, Supervisor displays an error message.
When the permissions definition for a user is created, the split/skill permissions do not take
effect until the user logs off and back on again.
Administration
July 2007
389
Steps
To add a split/skill permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user who will be assigned split/skill
permissions.
6. In the Splits/Skills: field, enter the name or number of the split/skill for which the user will
have permissions assigned.
This field can accept multiple splits/skills. Multiple entries must be separated by a
semicolon (;).
Multiple splits/skills can be entered by using a range, for example, 1-256.
390
Administration
July 2007
Split/Skill access
7. Place a check mark in the permissions that will be assigned to this user:
Read: - User can view but not modify information for the specified splits/skills including
reports.
Write: - User can modify information on the specified splits/skills. This permission
requires that the user also have the read permission.
Only the split/skill exceptions made active through the Exceptions feature will provide
notification to the user. See Chapter 8: Administering exceptions on page 283 for more
information.
8. After assigning the necessary permissions, select Actions > Add from the menu bar.
The split/skill permissions for this user are saved.
It is possible to add permission definitions for multiple splits/skills at one time. To do so,
enter multiple splits/skills in the Splits/Skills: field and separate them with semicolons (;).
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions Split/Skill
Access window.
Administration
July 2007
391
Steps
To view the split/skill permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the split/skill permissions
definition is to be viewed.
6. If the specific split/skill to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the split/
skill in the Splits/Skills: field. To have all splits/skills returned for this user ID, leave this
field blank.
This field can accept multiple splits/skills. Multiple entries must be separated by a
semicolon (;).
392
Administration
July 2007
Split/Skill access
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions Split/Skill
Access window.
Steps
To list all user permission definitions for a split/skill:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
Administration
July 2007
393
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions Split/Skill Access window.
394
When the permissions definition for a user is modified, the change does not take effect
until the user logs off and back on again.
If a user does not have corresponding ACD permissions for the permissions set for them
on the split/skill, Supervisor displays an error message.
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions Split/Skill
Access window.
Administration
July 2007
Split/Skill access
Steps
To modify the split/skill permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the split/skill permissions
definition is to be modified.
6. If the specific split/skill to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the split/
skill in the Splits/Skills: field. For all splits/skills to be returned for this user ID, leave this
field blank.
This field can accept multiple splits/skills. Multiple entries must be separated by a
semicolon (;).
Administration
July 2007
395
Important:
Read: - User can view but not modify information for the specified splits/skills including
reports.
Write: - User can modify information on the specified splits/skills. This permission
requires that the user also have the read permission.
Important:
If all permissions are to be removed for this user ID, it saves more server disk
space to delete this permission definition rather than disabling all permissions.
See Deleting split/skill user permissions on page 396 for more information.
Only the split/skill exceptions made active through the Exceptions feature will provide
notification to the user. See Chapter 8: Administering exceptions on page 283 for more
information.
9. After the necessary permission changes have been completed, select Actions > Modify
from the menu bar.
The permissions definition for this user ID and split/skill is updated. The status bar displays
a Successful message.
396
Administration
July 2007
Split/Skill access
Steps
To delete the split/skill permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the split/skill permissions
definition is to be deleted.
6. If the specific split/skill to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the split/
skill in the Splits/Skills: field. To return all split/skills for this user ID, leave this field blank.
Administration
July 2007
397
398
A CMS user ID must be created through the User Data feature before it can be assigned
trunk group permissions.
Administration
July 2007
When a new user ID is created through the User Data feature, trunk group permission
definitions for that user are not created. This is done to conserve disk space. When a trunk
group permissions definition does not exist for a user ID, CMS will deny read and write
access to trunk groups.
A user ID must first have permissions for the ACD on which the trunk group resides before
trunk group permissions can be assigned. If a user ID is assigned trunk group permissions
and does not have the appropriate ACD permissions, Supervisor displays an error
message.
A user ID cannot be assigned the write permission without first having the read
permission.
Assigning only those permissions that are necessary for each user ID ensures the best
system performance.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view trunk group user permissions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify trunk group user permissions, the user ID used to log in to this
Supervisor session requires write permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
If a user does not have corresponding ACD permissions for the permissions set for them
on the trunk group, Supervisor displays an error message.
When the permissions definition for a user is created, the trunk group permissions do not
take effect until the user logs off and back on again.
Administration
July 2007
399
Steps
To add a trunk group permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user who will be assigned trunk group
permissions.
6. In the Trunk Groups: field, enter the name or number of the trunk group for which the user
will have permissions assigned.
This field can accept multiple trunk groups. Multiple entries must be separated by a
semicolon (;).
7. Place a check mark in the permissions that will be assigned to this user:
400
Administration
July 2007
Read: - User can view but not modify information for the specified trunk groups
including reports.
Write: - User can modify information on the specified trunk groups. This permission
requires that the user also have the read permission.
Only the trunk group exceptions made active through the Exceptions feature will provide
notification to the user. See Chapter 8: Administering exceptions on page 283 for more
information.
8. After assigning the necessary permissions, select Actions > Add from the menu bar.
The trunk group permissions for this user are saved.
It is possible to add permission definitions for multiple trunk groups at one time. To do so,
enter multiple trunk groups in the Trunk Groups: field and separate them with semicolons
(;).
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions Trunk Group
Access window.
Administration
July 2007
401
Steps
To view the trunk group permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the trunk group permissions
definition is to be viewed.
6. If the specific trunk group to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the
trunk group in the Trunk Groups: field. To have all trunk groups returned for this user ID,
leave this field blank.
This field can accept multiple trunk groups. Multiple entries must be separated by a
semicolon (;).
402
Administration
July 2007
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions Trunk Group
Access window.
Steps
To list all user permission definitions for a trunk group:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
Administration
July 2007
403
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions Trunk Group Access window.
404
When the permissions definition for a user is modified, the change does not take effect
until the user logs off and back on again.
If a user does not have corresponding ACD permissions for the permissions set for them
on the trunk group, Supervisor displays an error message.
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions Trunk Group
Access window.
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To modify the trunk group permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the trunk group permissions
definition is to be modified.
6. If the specific trunk group to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the
trunk group in the Trunk Groups: field. To have all trunk groups returned for this user ID,
leave this field blank.
This field can accept multiple trunk groups. Multiple entries must be separated by a
semicolon (;).
Administration
July 2007
405
Important:
Read: - User can view but not modify information for the specified trunk groups
including reports.
Write: - User can modify information on the specified trunk groups. This permission
requires that the user also have the read permission.
Important:
If all permissions are to be removed for this user ID, it saves more server disk
space to delete this permission definition rather than disabling all permissions.
Only the trunk group exceptions made active through the Exceptions feature will provide
notification to the user. See Chapter 8: Administering exceptions on page 283 for more
information.
9. After the necessary permission changes have been completed, select Actions > Modify
from the menu bar.
The permissions definition for this user ID and trunk group is updated. The status bar
displays a Successful message upon completion.
406
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To delete the trunk group permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the trunk group permissions
definition is to be deleted.
6. If the specific trunk group to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the
trunk group in the Trunk Groups: field. To return all trunk groups for this user ID, leave this
field blank.
Administration
July 2007
407
Vector access
Vector permissions allow users to view data for vector reports, view vector configuration
information, and change vector configurations. The User Permissions Vector Access window
is also used to configure which users receive exception notifications.
This feature is not available if the Vectoring product has not been purchased and installed.
This section contains the following topics:
408
A CMS user ID must be created through the User Data feature before it can be assigned
vector permissions.
Administration
July 2007
Vector access
When a new user ID is created through the User Data feature, vector permission
definitions for that user are not created. This is done to conserve disk space. When a
vector permissions definition does not exist for a user ID, CMS will deny read and write
access to vectors.
A user ID must first have permissions for the ACD on which the vector resides before
vector permissions can be assigned. If a user ID is assigned vector permissions and does
not have the appropriate ACD permissions, Supervisor displays an error message.
A user ID cannot be assigned the write permission without first having the read
permission.
Assigning only those permissions that are necessary for each user ID ensures the best
system performance.
A user must be given the exceptions permission in order to be notified of vector exceptions
that occur.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view vector user permissions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify vector user permissions, the user ID used to log in to this
Supervisor session requires write permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
If a user does not have corresponding ACD permissions for the permissions set for them
on the vector, Supervisor displays an error message.
When the permissions definition for a user is created, the vector permissions do not take
effect until the user logs off and back on again.
Administration
July 2007
409
Steps
To add a vector permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user who will be assigned vector permissions.
6. In the Vectors: field, enter the name or number of the vector for which the user will have
permissions assigned.
This field can accept multiple vectors. Multiple entries must be separated by a semicolon
(;).
7. Place a check mark in the permissions that will be assigned to this user:
410
Administration
July 2007
Vector access
Read: - User can view but not modify information for the specified vectors including
reports.
Write: - User can modify information on the specified vectors. This permission
requires that the user also have the read permission.
Only the vector exceptions made active through the Exceptions feature will provide
notification to the user. See Chapter 8: Administering exceptions on page 283 for more
information.
8. After assigning the necessary permissions, select Actions > Add from the menu bar.
The vector permissions for this user are saved.
It is possible to add permission definitions for multiple vectors at one time. To do so, enter
multiple vectors in the Vectors: field and separate them with semicolons (;).
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions Vector Access
window.
Administration
July 2007
411
Steps
To view the vector permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the vector permissions definition
is to be viewed.
6. If the specific vector to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the vector
in the Vectors: field. To have all vectors returned for this user ID, leave this field blank.
This field can accept multiple vectors. Multiple entries must be separated by a semicolon
(;).
412
Administration
July 2007
Vector access
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions Vector Access
window.
Steps
To list all user permission definitions for a vector:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
Administration
July 2007
413
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions Vector Access window.
414
When the permissions definition for a user is modified, the change does not take effect
until the user logs off and back on again.
If a user does not have corresponding ACD permissions for the permissions set for them
on the vector, Supervisor displays an error message.
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions Vector Access
window.
Administration
July 2007
Vector access
Steps
To modify the vector permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the vector permissions definition
is to be modified.
6. If the specific vector to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the vector
in the Vectors: field. To have all vectors returned for this user ID, leave this field blank.
This field can accept multiple vectors. Multiple entries must be separated by a semicolon
(;).
Administration
July 2007
415
Important:
Read: - User can view but not modify information for the specified vectors including
reports.
Write: - User can modify information on the specified vectors. This permission
requires that the user also have the read permission.
Important:
If all permissions are to be removed for this user ID, it saves more server disk
space to delete this permission definition rather than disabling all permissions.
Only the vector exceptions made active through the Exceptions feature will provide
notification to the user. See Chapter 8: Administering exceptions on page 283 for more
information.
9. After the necessary permission changes have been completed, select Actions > Modify
from the menu bar.
The permissions definition for this user ID and vector is updated. The status bar displays a
Successful message upon completion.
416
Administration
July 2007
Vector access
Steps
To delete the vector permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the vector permissions definition
is to be deleted.
6. If the specific vector to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the vector
in the Vectors: field. To return all vectors for this user ID, leave this field blank.
Administration
July 2007
417
VDN access
Vector Directory Number (VDN) permissions allow users to view data for VDN reports, view
VDN configuration information, and change VDN configurations. The User Permissions VDN
Access window is also used to configure which users receive exception notifications.
This feature is not available if the Vectoring product has not been purchased, installed, and
enabled on the corresponding ACD.
This section contains the following topics:
418
A CMS user ID must be created through the User Data feature before it can be assigned
VDN permissions.
Administration
July 2007
VDN access
When a new user ID is created through the User Data feature, VDN permission definitions
for that user are not created. This is done to conserve disk space. When a VDN
permissions definition does not exist for a user ID, CMS denies read and write access to
VDNs.
A user ID must first have permissions for the ACD on which the VDN resides before VDN
permissions can be assigned. If a user ID is assigned VDN permissions and does not have
the appropriate ACD permissions, Supervisor an error message.
A user ID cannot be assigned the write permission without first having the read
permission.
Assigning only those permissions that are necessary for each user ID ensures the best
system performance.
A user must be given the exceptions permission in order to be notified of VDN exceptions
that occur.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view VDN user permissions, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify VDN user permissions, the user ID used to log in to this
Supervisor session requires write permission for the User Permissions subsystem.
If a user does not have corresponding ACD permissions for the permissions set for them
on the VDN, Supervisor displays an error message.
When the permissions definition for a user is created, the VDN permissions do not take
effect until the user logs off and back on again.
Administration
July 2007
419
Steps
To add a VDN permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user who will be assigned VDN permissions.
6. In the VDNs: field, enter the name or number of the VDN for which the user will have
permissions assigned.
This field can accept multiple VDNs. Multiple entries must be separated by a semicolon
(;).
7. Place a check mark in the permissions that will be assigned to this user:
420
Administration
July 2007
VDN access
Read: - User can view but not modify information for the specified VDNs including
reports.
Write: - User can modify information on the specified VDNs. This permission requires
that the user also have the read permission.
Only the VDN exceptions made active through the Exceptions feature will provide
notification to the user. See Chapter 8: Administering exceptions on page 283 for more
information.
8. After assigning the necessary permissions, select Actions > Add from the menu bar.
The VDN permissions for this user are saved.
It is possible to add permission definitions for multiple VDNs at one time. To do so, enter
multiple VDNs in the VDNs: field and separate them with semicolons (;).
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions VDN Access
window.
Administration
July 2007
421
Steps
To view the VDN permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the VDN permissions definition
is to be viewed.
6. If the specific VDN to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the VDN in
the VDNs: field. To have all VDNs returned for this user ID, leave this field blank.
This field can accept multiple VDNs. Multiple entries must be separated by a semicolon
(;).
422
Administration
July 2007
VDN access
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions VDN Access
window.
Steps
To list all user permission definitions for a VDN:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
Administration
July 2007
423
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions VDN Access window.
424
When the permissions definition for a user is modified, the change does not take effect
until the user logs off and back on again.
If a user does not have corresponding ACD permissions for the permissions set for them
on the VDN, Supervisor displays an error message.
Administration
July 2007
VDN access
The wildcard characters * and ? cannot be used in the User Permissions VDN Access
window.
Steps
To modify the VDN permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the VDN permissions definition
is to be modified.
Administration
July 2007
425
6. If the specific VDN to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the VDN in
the VDNs: field. To have all VDNs returned for this user ID, leave this field blank.
This field can accept multiple VDNs. Multiple entries must be separated by a semicolon
(;).
7. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
The database is queried and the number of matches found for this user ID displays in the
status bar. The first match found populates the fields of this dialog box.
If multiple matches are found, use the Next and Previous items found under the Action
menu to navigate to the correct VDN.
8. Change the permissions for the user on this VDN as needed:
Important:
Read: - User can view but not modify information for the specified VDNs including
reports.
Write: - User can modify information on the specified VDNs. This permission requires
that the user also have the read permission.
Important:
If all permissions are to be removed for this user ID, it saves more server disk
space to delete this permission definition rather than disabling all permissions.
Only the VDN exceptions made active through the Exceptions feature will provide
notification to the user. See Chapter 8: Administering exceptions on page 283 for more
information.
9. After the necessary permission changes have been completed, select Actions > Modify
from the menu bar.
The permissions definition for this user ID and VDN is updated. The status bar displays a
Successful message upon completion.
426
Administration
July 2007
VDN access
Steps
To delete the VDN permissions definition for a CMS user:
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > User Permissions.
Supervisor displays the User Permissions window.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the name of the user for which the VDN permissions definition
is to be deleted.
6. If the specific VDN to view for this user is known, enter the name or number of the VDN in
the VDNs: field. To return all VDNs for this user ID, leave this field blank.
Administration
July 2007
427
428
Administration
July 2007
CMS state
CMS can run in two operational states:
Administration
July 2007
429
Single-user mode - Only one user can be logged on to the CMS server at a time.
The single-user mode is necessary when changes must be made to the following systems and
procedures:
Storage intervals
The CMS State window can be used to select which ACD serves as the master for time
synchronization. The time displayed on the Controller window originates from the master ACD.
This section contains the following topics:
Viewing data in the Data Storage Allocation, Storage Intervals, and Restore Data
windows can be done through both the multi-user and single-user modes.
To add to or modify configuration settings for the Data Storage Allocation, Storage
Intervals, or Restore Data windows requires that the CMS state is set to single-user
mode.
If a log out is performed while CMS is still in the single-user state, at least ten seconds
must pass before a logon can be performed.
When in single-user mode, CMS continues to collect data for all ACDs with the data
collection feature enabled.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
430
To view the CMS state or the master ACD, the user ID used to log on to this Supervisor
session requires read permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
Administration
July 2007
CMS state
To modify the CMS state or the master ACD, the user ID used to log on to this Supervisor
session requires write permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
Steps
To change the current CMS state:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
Administration
July 2007
431
Single-user mode - Specifies that the CMS state is being set to single-user mode.
When CMS is set to single-user mode, a message box displays to all users indicating
that CMS will be brought down in one minute. Users are automatically logged off after
one minute.
Multi-user mode - Specifies that the CMS state is being set to allow multiple users to
log on to CMS
5. After selecting the CMS user mode, select Actions > Modify from the menu bar.
If the CMS user mode is set to single-user, all CMS users are notified to log off. If the CMS
user mode is set to multi-user, CMS users can again log on to the system.
Steps
!
Important:
Important:
Changing the master ACD requires that you turn data collection off.
To select the ACD which will serve as the master for time synchronization:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
432
Administration
July 2007
Data collection
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the CMS State window.
4. In the Master ACD for clock synchronization: field, select the ACD that will serve as the
master for the synchronization of time for CMS.
5. After selecting the master ACD, select Actions > Modify from the menu bar.
The selected ACD is set as the master for time synchronization and the status bar displays
a Successful message.
Data collection
The Data Collection window is used to enable and disable the storing of data for real ACDs.
When data collection is disabled, no contact center data is recorded during the current interval.
Also, reports run to include this time period will not accurately reflect the activities in the contact
center.
This section contains the following topic:
When data collection is enabled, the connection status of the link should be monitored to
ensure data is being transferred. Use the Connection Status feature in the Maintenance
subsystem to view this information.
The data collection feature does not apply for pseudo-ACDs as they do not collect data.
Administration
July 2007
433
When changing the data collection status, each ACD must be administered separately.
Data collection must be disabled when making changes to the following features:
- Data Storage Allocation
- Storage Intervals
- Change Master ACD
- Restore specific types of data
- Migrate specific types of data
Viewing data through the features listed above can be done with data collection enabled.
Data collection must be enabled for the current ACD in order to activate an agent trace or
do any switch administration from CMS.
When data collection is disabled, no new data is collected. If calls are in the system, the
data they generate is not recorded in CMS. If data collection is to be disabled, it is best to
wait for the current interval to be archived so that data loss is minimized.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view Data Collection settings, the user ID used to log on to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
To modify the Data Collection settings, the user ID used to log on to this Supervisor
session requires write permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
434
Administration
July 2007
Data collection
Steps
1. On the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
4. In the ACD: field, select the ACD which will have data collection turned on or off.
5. Under Data collection:, select one of the following options:
Administration
July 2007
435
436
A full maintenance backup should be performed before changing the Data Storage
Allocation configuration.
If changes to the Communication Manager system are made through the swsetup
command on the CMS console, the settings for Data Storage Allocation should be
checked to ensure that storage is set for any new or modified entities. For example, enable
the Call Vectoring feature requires data storage space for VDNs and vectors. Changing
the release of the Communication Manager system may change the number of measured
entities allowed and affect the storage allocation for each entity.
Disable data collection for all real ACDs before making modifications through Data
Storage Allocation.
Set the CMS state to single-user mode before making modifications through Data Storage
Allocation.
When determining the amount of storage space needed, remember that future growth of
items, such as trunk groups or splits/skills, need to be taken into account.
For reference, print out the Data Storage Allocation window before modifications are
made.
If a Data Storage Allocation window is modifying data, do not open a second Data
Storage Allocation window. Wait for the first window to finish the modifications as
performing simultaneous modifications through two Data Storage Allocation windows
can result in damage to data tables.
Administration
July 2007
Activating a feature such as vectoring requires not only changing switch parameters but
also requires the allocation of space for VDNs and vectors which did not have space
previously allocated.
The amount of free space available on the server limits the maximum amount of storage
space usable through Data Storage Allocation. Use the Free Space Allocation window
to view the utilization of disk space before making changes to Data Storage Allocation. If
changes are made to the Data Storage Allocation settings, you must run Free Space
Allocation so that the disk space is properly adjusted.
The length of the intrahour interval affects the amount of disk space required to store
intrahour data. For example, an intrahour interval of 30 minutes requires twice the amount
of disk space than an intrahour interval of 60 minutes.
If the Call Vectoring feature has not been purchased and installed, the fields corresponding
to call work codes, vectors, and VDNs are not displayed.
The data storage values determine how much data is available for running historical
reports. For example, if weekly and monthly data is not saved, weekly or monthly reports
display no data.
Disk space affects the amount of historical data that can be stored. The following list
provides the maximum durations possible when storing historical data:
- Intrahour - 62 days
- Daily - 1825 days (5 years)
- Weekly - 520 weeks (10 years)
- Monthly - 120 months (10 years)
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view Data Storage Allocation settings, the user ID used to log on to this Supervisor
session requires read permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
To modify Data Storage Allocation settings, the user ID used to log on to this Supervisor
session requires write permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
Administration
July 2007
437
Steps
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
438
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Data Storage Allocation window.
A full maintenance backup should be performed before changing the Data Storage
Allocation configuration.
Administration
July 2007
439
Data storage allocation needs vary among installations. Base your CMS data storage needs on
these criteria:
440
The size of the real ACDs and all pseudo-ACDs, such as number of agents, trunks, and so
forth.
The length of time for data to be stored. For example, 30 days versus 100 days versus
two years.
Administration
July 2007
Fields
The following table lists the fields found on the Data Storage Allocation window.
Field
Description
Data Item
# of Items
Administration
July 2007
441
442
Field
Description
Days of
Intrahour
The number of days where the system stores intrahour data for splits/
skills, agents, trunk groups, trunks, call work codes, vectors, and VDNs.
Each entity can have a different number of days associated with it.
A 0 (zero) in this field causes the system to discard intrahour data which
also means that no daily, weekly, or monthly data can be collected.
When data collection reaches the end of the length of time specified,
the data is combined, archived, and appended into daily information.
Days of Daily
The number of days for which the system stores daily data for splits/
skills, agents, trunk groups, trunks, call work codes, vectors, and VDNs.
Each entity can have a different number of days associated with it.
A 0 (zero) in this field causes the system to discard daily data which
also means that no daily or weekly data can be collected.
When data collection reaches the end of the length of time specified,
the data is combined, archived, and appended into weekly information.
Weeks of
Weekly
The number of weeks for which the system stores weekly data for splits/
skills, agents, trunk groups, trunks, call work codes, vectors, and VDNs.
Each entity can have a different number of weeks associated with it.
A 0 (zero) in this field causes the system to discard weekly data.
When data collection reaches the end of the length of time specified,
the data is combined, archived, and appended into monthly information.
Months of
Monthly
The number of months for which the system stores monthly data for
splits/skills, agents, trunk groups, trunks, call work codes, vectors, and
VDNs.
Each entity can have a different number of months associated with it.
A 0 (zero) in this field causes the system to discard monthly data.
When data collection reaches the end of the length of time specified,
the data is deleted.
Administration
July 2007
Field
Description
Shift n times
(1, 2, 3, or 4)
The shift start and stop times for each shift of agents (up to four shifts)
for the specified ACD. This information is used to calculate the amount
of space to be reserved for this historical agent table.
Shifts may overlap.
If you specify a shift that starts before the data collection start time or
ends after the data collection stop time, you receive an error message.
The data collection start and stop times are found in the Storage
Intervals window in System Setup....
CMS rounds shift times to the nearest interval. For example, if you use
30-minute intervals and specify a shift from 8:15 to 5:15, CMS
assumes that this shift is from 8:00 to 5:30.
Shift must be at least one minute in length.
Specify 24-hour shifts according to the following example:
8:00AM to 7:59AM
This information is used throughout CMS.
Maximum
agents logged
in
Total split/skill
members,
summed over
all splits/skills
Number of
agent login/
logout records
Administration
July 2007
443
Field
Description
Number of
agent trace
records
The number of agent trace records for the currently specified ACD. This
number is not representative of all ACDs.
Number of
unmeasured
trunk facilities
Number of
exception
records
The total number of exceptions stored for CMS. This total is for each
type of exception, such as agents, splits/skills, VDNs, and so forth.
Number of call
records
The number of call records the system stores for a selected ACD. Using
the CMS server for storage and analysis allows a maximum of 5000
records.
If the Avaya CMS External Call History product has been purchased
and installed, another computer can be used for storage and analysis of
the call records. This field then represents the amount of buffer space
set aside on the CMS server that is used to collect the call records prior
to transmission to the other system. The maximum value for this field
using this configuration is 999999 across all ACDs.
Data summarizing
Data is automatically archived based on the entries in the Storage Intervals window. The Data
Summarizing window is used to manually archive data in the daily, weekly, and monthly tables
of the historical database.
This section contains the following topic:
444
Administration
July 2007
Data summarizing
!
Important:
Important:
Since data is automatically archived based on the entries in the Storage
Intervals window, this tool must not be used unless an archive failed or did not
occur.
Using the Data Summarizing window causes the archiving to happen immediately.
Multiple data summarizing requests are queued and are run in the order requested.
Automatic daily, weekly, and monthly data summaries are queued along with manual
requests so that just one type of data summarizing occurs at a time.
Adequate storage space must be made available through the Data Storage Allocation
window before archiving can occur.
A manual archive cannot be performed unless data exists in the daily, weekly, or monthly
tables. If a day of data is missing within the period you are attempting to manually archive,
the archive will fail.
Results of daily, weekly, and monthly archives can be viewed through the Error Log Report
or the Archiving Status window.
If CMS is not operational when an automatic archive should occur, an error message is
logged which indicates that a manual archive should be performed using the Data
Summarizing window.
If an incomplete week or month is specified as a date, data summarizing will not occur.
Partial weekly or monthly data cannot be summarized.
For example, if a week is configured in the Storage Intervals window as being Monday
through Friday, entering a date which falls on Saturday in the Data Summarizing window
results in the week previous to the date specified being archived.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the Data Summarizing window, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires read permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
To use the Data Summarizing window to perform an archive of the system, the user ID
used to log in to this Supervisor session requires write permission for the CMS System
Setup feature.
Administration
July 2007
445
Archiving data
This section provides the procedure for manually archiving data using the Data Summarizing
window.
Steps
To archive data with the Data Summarizing window:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
4. In the ACD: field, select the ACD for which data will be archived.
5. In the Data type: field, select the appropriate option:
446
Administration
July 2007
Daily - Archives data for one day. A daily summary archives a partial day. Daily
summaries must be complete for each day of the week or month before CMS archives
the data for that week or month
Weekly - Archives data for one week. A weekly summary must be requested by
entering a date that falls within a completed predefined week. See the weekly
configuration in the Storage Intervals window.
Monthly - Archives data for one month. Set any day during the month in a completed
month for which monthly data should be summarized.
A wallboard - This is a large display placed in a contact center where all agents can view
data. This data can consist of the number of calls in the queue, calls being handled by
different splits/skills, and other information.
An employee scheduler program - This third-party software is used to compare the start
and end times for agents with schedules created by management.
A contact center data consolidation program - This third-party software is used to collect
data from all contact centers for reporting purposes.
Administration
July 2007
447
In the United States, external applications are designed and administered by the Avaya
Professional Services Organization. For more information about external applications, call
Avaya Contact Center CRM Solutions at 1-877-927-6662. For assistance outside the
United States, contact your local Avaya distributor or representative.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view External Application Status data, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires read permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
To enable or disable the External Application Status feature, and start or stop external
applications, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires write permission
for the CMS System Setup feature.
448
Administration
July 2007
Steps
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
4. In the External Application (Select one): group, select the External application feature
(turns on/off all applications) option.
5. Select the appropriate option from the Application status (Select one): group:
Start - This option will enable the External Application Status feature.
Stop - This option will disable the External Application Status feature.
Administration
July 2007
449
Steps
To view the states of any external applications:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
4. In the External Applications (Select one): group, select External application feature
(turns on/off all applications).
450
Administration
July 2007
Running - The external application has started and is still running after ten seconds.
Stopped - All processes associated with the external application have stopped.
Failed - The external application has failed repeatedly and is no longer being
restarted.
Steps
To start or stop an external application:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
Administration
July 2007
451
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the External Application Status window.
4. Select the Application name: option and enter the name of the application to start or stop
in the adjacent field.
5. In the Application status (Select one): group, select the appropriate option:
Running - The external application has started and is still running after ten seconds.
Stopped - All processes associated with the external application have stopped.
Failed - The external application has failed repeatedly and is no longer being
restarted.
452
Administration
July 2007
Storage on the CMS server is managed by Informix Dynamic Server (IDS). This feature allows
information to be stored in chunks where each one is equivalent to 256 megabytes. Each
contact center entity, such as splits/skills, trunk groups, VDNs and so forth, is given an amount
of data storage space on the CMS server through the Data Storage Allocation window.
If, at any time, you modify the Data Storage Allocation configuration, the Free Space
Allocation window must be used to ensure that the appropriate number of chunks are allocated
for use within the affected ACD dbspace. Failure to do so can result in serious data storage
problems.
This section contains the following topics:
When any of the CMS data storage parameters are altered, the change is reflected (for
information purposes only) in the Free Space Allocation window. For example, if the
number of splits/skills on your system is increased in the Data Storage Allocation
window, the Free Space Allocation window will then display the new number as well as
the approximate amount of disk space required to handle the data storage for splits/skills.
The IDS dbspaces used in the Free Space Allocation window are created during
installation.
It is not necessary to disable the Data Collection feature in order to modify the Free
Space Allocation window.
If more data storage space is allocated on a file system than is available, the Allocated
Space field in the Free Space Allocation window will display its value in parentheses.
Be sure to check the Available Space field of an ACD dbspace before increasing any data
storage parameters through the Data Storage Allocation feature. Doing this can ensure
that there will be enough disk space available.
Be aware that creating custom tables causes CMS to use more disk space. If dbspace that
is used to store custom tables nears capacity, you are presented with a warning message
during login.
Administration
July 2007
453
Values entered in the CMS System Setup features of Data Storage Allocation, Storage
Intervals, and Call Work Codes directly affect usage of disk space. Check Free Space
Allocation when any of these features are modified.
Values entered in the Data Storage Allocation window of Forecast Administration also
affect storage space and cause the need for Free Space Allocation to be run.
If a new ACD is added, a new ACD dbspace will be created. Information on adding a new
ACD to the CMS server can be found in the chapter, Maintaining the CMS software, in the
Avaya Call Management System Software Installation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting
document.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the Free Space Allocation window, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires read permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
To modify ACD dbspaces through the Free Space Allocation window, the user ID used to
log in to this Supervisor session requires write permission for the CMS System Setup
feature.
454
Administration
July 2007
Steps
To view the usage of data storage for ACD dbspaces:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
This window displays the following information for each ACD dbspace:
Current Size - The total amount of disk space used for this dbspace. Since IDS uses
256 MB chunks, this number will always be in increments of 256,000 kilobytes.
Allocated Size - The amount of space needed to store data based on the settings in
the Data Storage Allocation window
Administration
July 2007
455
Available Space - The space that will be available after all data has been collected for
the time periods specified in the Data Storage Allocation window. This number is
calculated by subtracting Allocated Size from Current Size.
Space used to Date - The amount of data actually stored at this time
The window may take a few minutes to open as CMS is calculating the current free space
and other values on the system before the window can be displayed.
Steps
To view the amount of storage used by contact center entities within an ACD dbspace:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
456
Administration
July 2007
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Free Space Allocation input window.
Note:
Note:
The window make take a few minutes to open as CMS is calculating the current
free space before the window can be displayed.
4. In the Enter Dbspace name:, enter the name of the ACD dbspace to view.
5. From the menu bar, select Actions > Get contents.
Supervisor displays a secondary window showing the amount of data currently in use by
each contact center entity.
Administration
July 2007
457
Steps
To modify the number of IDS chunks assigned to ACD dbspaces:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
458
Administration
July 2007
Note:
Note:
The window make take a few minutes to open as CMS is calculating the current
free space before the window can be displayed.
4. In the Enter Dbspace name:, enter the name of the ACD dbspace to adjust.
5. From the menu bar, select Actions > Modify.
CMS calculates if more, fewer, or the same number of chunks is required for the specified
ACD dbspace and displays a dialog box asking if the process should continue.
If less than 256000 KB of disk space is available when the Modify command is executed,
an error message will appear that states that no more ACD dbspace chunks can be
created.
!
Important:
Important:
It is important that you ensure that the Current Size is greater than the Allocated
Size. It is possible for you to create the undesired situation where the Allocated
Size is larger than the Current Size by setting large values in the Data Storage
Allocation window and then not using the Free Space Allocation window to
modify the ACD dbspace appropriately. While the Free Space Allocation window
may display a positive value in the Total Free Space field, it is important to
remember that the Allocated Size field is a projection of how much space will be
used in the future when all the data has been collected for the time periods you
have specified. If the number in the Available Space field is in parentheses, this
indicates that there will not be enough room to store all the data.
6. If CMS requires a change in the number of chunks used by the ACD dbspace, select Yes
from the dialog box.
The number of chunks for the specified ACD dbspace is modified and the status bar
displays a Successful message.
!
Important:
Important:
Do not reboot the system until all chunks have been moved. For more information
about verifying when you can reboot the CMS system, see Verifying chunk
allocation on page 459.
Administration
July 2007
459
3. Enter:
onstat -d |egrep -c 'MR|MD'
4. Repeat Step 3 until only the command prompt is displayed by the system. There must be
no MR or MD messages. You can reboot the system when only the command prompt is
displayed by the system.
Attempting to migrate Agent and Call Center Administration data more once may cause
serious errors from which recovery is difficult. A re-migration of ACD administration data
requires a second setup of the CMS software must be performed.
To migrate Agent and Call Center Administration data, CMS must be in single-user
mode.
Migrations of system administration data cannot be done in phases. Migrating some user
IDs at one time and others at a later time results in two separate sets of data. Only one set
of data can be used and cannot be migrated into another set.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
460
To run the R3 Migrate Data process, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires write permission for CMS System Setup.
Administration
July 2007
Migrating R3 data
This section provides the procedure for using the R3 Migrate Data to merge data created using
a previous version of CMS to the database of the current version.
Steps
To migrate R3 data into the current database:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
Administration
July 2007
461
4. In the Device name: field, enter the device that will read the backup tape containing the
data.
To list all devices on the system, select Actions > List devices.
!
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If you choose the System Administration data option in this step, note that this
migration can only be performed once. Performing the migration of this data a
second time can result in corruption of the password tables.
5. In the Data type: group, select one of the following three options:
462
Data type
Migrated data
System
Administration data
(single user required)
Administration
July 2007
Data type
Migrated data
Agent/Call Center
Admin data
(single user required)
Historical data
6. In the Stop date: field, enter the date through which you wish to record data for migration
to the new CMS. The migration process does not migrate data collected after the date
specified.
Leaving this field blank will cause the program to migrate data up to the data written on the
tape by the CMS Maintenance Backup procedure.
7. In the Stop time: field, enter the time through which you wish to record data for migration
to the new CMS. The migration process does not migrate data collected after the stop date
and time specified.
If this field is left blank, the stop time defaults to 23:59.
8. In the Specify ACD(s) to migrate: group, select one of the following options:
Administration
All ACDs - Data is migrated from the backup tape to the hard disk on an ACD-by-ACD
basis. Data for ACD1 on the tape backup will be used for ACD1 on the new CMS.
July 2007
463
Single ACD - Historical data is migrated from the backup tape to the hard disk for the
ACDs specified in the from: and to: fields.
For example, to migrate data from ACD1 on the backup tape to ACD4 on the new
CMS, place 1 in the from: field and 4 in the to: field.
9. From the menu bar, select Actions > Run. The Run menu item appears only if the
settings for Data Collection and CMS State are appropriate for the type of migration
selected.
CMS begins the migration process. The Status: field will report the progress of the
migration.
Pseudo-ACDs
A pseudo-ACD is an area created on the CMS server to store previously backed-up ACD data.
A pseudo-ACD is not a real ACD and does not communicate with any Communication Manager
system.
Pseudo-ACDs are used to store data which can then be viewed in reports. This could be useful
in the following scenarios:
Storing data from an off-site contact center for the purposes of reporting in conjunction with
an on-site CMS.
Storing data for archival purposes. This data can no longer be deleted by the Data
Storage Allocation feature and can be used to generate reports on older data for
comparison with more recent ACD data.
464
Each pseudo-ACD is given a number from 9 through 26. Numbers 1 through 8 are
reserved for eight real ACDs connected to the CMS server.
Administration
July 2007
Pseudo-ACDs
In order to load the pseudo-ACD data, the CMS server must have enough free space
available. Use the Free Space Allocation window to see how much space is required for
the existing ACDs and how much is available for the pseudo-ACD data.
Use the Data Storage Allocation window to define how much historical data will be stored
for the pseudo-ACD. Enter storage values equal to or greater than those used from the
ACD which originally held the data.
Use the Storage Intervals window to set storage intervals for the pseudo-ACD data to
match the interval size and data collection times of the ACD from which the data was
taken.
The Data Collection feature can be running when modifications are made in the Data
Storage Allocation or Storage Intervals windows for a pseudo-ACD, but CMS must be in
single-user mode.
If the pseudo-ACD has the separately purchased Forecast feature on it, Forecast Data
Storage Allocation parameters may require changes in order to match those of the
pseudo-ACD. This is not the same as the Data Storage Allocation window normally used
in CMS.
In order for users to access the pseudo-ACD, permissions must be given through the ACD
Access window in the User Permissions subsystem.
A pseudo-ACD can have a name assigned to it in the Dictionary even before the
pseudo-ACD is created.
Creation of a pseudo-ACD using Supervisor while users are logged in requires that the
users log out and back in before they can see the new pseudo-ACD.
Before deleting a pseudo-ACD, turn off permissions to it so that users will not be working
in the pseudo-ACD when it is deleted.
Administration
July 2007
465
The following menu items are available when a pseudo-ACD is selected and the
appropriate user permissions are assigned:
Reports
Historical
Dictionary
all submenu items
Forecast
all submenu items
Custom Reports
all submenu items
User Permissions
all submenu items
Maintenance
CMS State
ACD Status
Data Collection
Archiving Status
Data Storage
Allocations
Backup Data
Data Summarizing
Backup/Restore
Devices
Connection Status
Load Pseudo-ACD
Printer Administration
Pseudo-ACD Setup
Restore Data
R3 Migrate Data
Storage Intervals
Switch Setup
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view the Pseudo-ACD Setup window, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires read permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
To add or delete pseudo-ACDs, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires write permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
Creating a pseudo-ACD
This section provides the procedure for creating a pseudo-ACD on a CMS server.
466
Administration
July 2007
Pseudo-ACDs
Steps
To create a pseudo-ACD on a CMS server:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
4. In the ACD: field, enter the number or the name of the pseudo-ACD. The number can
range from 9 to 26. This field requires a number to be entered if a name for this
pseudo-ACD has not been defined in the Dictionary.
5. From the menu bar, select Actions > Add.
CMS creates the pseudo-ACD.
Viewing pseudo-ACDs
This section provides the procedure for listing the pseudo-ACDs on a CMS server.
Administration
July 2007
467
Steps
To list pseudo-ACDs on a CMS server:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
Deleting a pseudo-ACD
This section provides the procedure for deleting a pseudo-ACD on a CMS server.
468
Administration
July 2007
Pseudo-ACDs
Steps
To delete a pseudo-ACD on a CMS server:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
Administration
July 2007
469
A pseudo-ACD must have been created in order for data to be loaded into it.
Loading data into a pseudo-ACD requires data archived from an existing ACD on a CMS
server.
Set the pseudo-ACD as the current ACD before attempting to load data into it.
Since the pseudo-ACD accepts any data on a backup volume, the data from a full backup
may be more than needed. Loading a pseudo-ACD with a full backup creates the
possibility of disk space problems. To eliminate this problem, perform a Specific Tables
backup when creating the ACD data to load on a pseudo-ACD.
Loading a pseudo-ACD with data automatically overwrites any existing data currently used
by the pseudo-ACD.
The number of splits/skills, agents, and other contact center entities are set to 0 (zero) for
the pseudo-ACD when it is created. Set these entities to match the ACD supplying the
data. Change these settings through the Call Center Administration feature.
When created, a new pseudo-ACD has historical data storage parameters set to 0 (zero).
To load data into the pseudo-ACD, the historical data storage parameters must be set to
those of the ACD from which the data was archived, if not greater. Change these settings
through the Data Storage Allocation window.
The Storage Intervals and Data Collection settings for the pseudo-ACD require
configuration in order to match those of the ACD supplying the data. If these settings are
incorrect, loading the data into the pseudo-ACD fails.
Permissions
To load data into a pseudo-ACD, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session requires
write permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
470
Administration
July 2007
Pseudo-ACDs
Steps
To load a data backup into a pseudo-ACD:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
2. In the ACD: field, select the pseudo-ACD that will receive the data.
3. In the Operations: list, highlight Load Pseudo-ACD Data.
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Load Pseudo-ACD Data window.
5. In the From ACD: field, enter the number of the ACD used to make the data backup.
6. In the Device name: field, enter the name of the device that has the backup volume
loaded.
To list all the devices on the CMS server, select Actions > List devices from the menu
bar.
Administration
July 2007
471
7. In the Start date: field, enter the date representing the first day of historical data to load on
the pseudo-ACD. CMS searches the data backup for this date which serves as the starting
point for loading data.
8. In the Start time: field, enter the time of the Start date: for which CMS will start loading
data. The default is 12:00AM.
9. In the Stop date: field, enter the last date of historical data that CMS will load on the
pseudo-ACD.
10. In the Stop time: field, enter the time of the Stop date: for which CMS will stop loading
data from the data backup. The default is 12:00AM.
11. From the menu bar, select Actions > Run.
CMS begins loading data from the backup into the pseudo-ACD. The Status: field at the
top of the window displays events in the loading process. The Errors: field displays any
problems encountered during the loading process.
Cancelling the load process before it is finished will cause the pseudo-ACD to have partial
data.
Storage intervals
The Storage Intervals window allows changes to be made to CMS which affect how and when
data for the contact center is stored.
It is recommended that these settings are configured during installation and not changed
because subsequent changes will affect data storage and report data coverage.
This section contains the following topics:
472
Administration
July 2007
Storage intervals
CMS must be in single-user mode and the data collection must be off before modifications
to these settings can be made.
Do not open another Storage Intervals window if one is already being used to alter these
settings. The loss of data tables can result if multiple Storage Intervals windows are used.
Free space allocation, data storage allocation, and storage intervals closely tied. A change
in storage intervals may require adjustment of data storage or storage times in the Data
Storage Allocation and Free Space Allocation windows. The more frequently CMS
archives data, the more storage space is required.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view settings in the Storage Intervals window, the user ID used to log in to this
Supervisor session requires read permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
To modify settings in the Storage Intervals window, the user ID used to log in to this
Supervisor session requires write permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
Administration
July 2007
473
Steps
To view settings in the Storage Intervals window:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
474
Administration
July 2007
Storage intervals
Changing the intrahour interval can result in a lengthy process as CMS must make
modifications to all previously collected data.
Increasing the frequency of the intrahour interval results in the contact center data taking
more storage space. This can require changes to the length of time for which CMS stores
contact center data. To change the length of time which data is stored, use the Data
Storage Allocation window.
Perform a full backup of historical data before making changes to the intrahour interval or
data collection times or dates. After the changes are made, perform another full backup of
historical data.
Real-time reports use the intrahour interval when displaying data. Cumulative data is reset
to zero at the beginning of each intrahour interval.
Steps
To change the setting for the intrahour interval:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
Administration
July 2007
475
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Storage Intervals window.
5. In the Intrahour interval (Select one): group, select the option for the rate at which CMS
archives contact center data.
!
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not open another Storage Intervals window and attempt to change other
settings during the following step. Doing so can result in the loss of database
tables.
476
Administration
July 2007
Storage intervals
CMS must be in single-user mode and the data collection must be off before modifications
to these settings can be made.
If an ACD is connected to a CMS server in the same time zone, the Switch time zone
offset: field should be set to 0.
This procedure does not effect the time stamps on the CMS reports, real time or historical.
This procedure does not effect the timetable schedule for timetables set to run at local
times for a specific ACD.
Steps
To change the time zone offset for an ACD:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
Administration
July 2007
477
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Storage Intervals window.
5. In the Switch time zone offset (-23 to +23): field, enter the number of hours that will
convert the time zone of the ACD so that it matches the time zone of the CMS server.
If the ACD time is ahead of the CMS time, you must enter a plus sign (+) followed by the
number of hours the ACD is ahead. If the ACD time is behind the CMS time, you must
enter a minus sign (-) followed by the number of hours the ACD is behind.
For example, if the master ACD is in New York City and the CMS server is in Los Angeles,
you would enter +3 because the ACD is 3 hours ahead of the CMS time. The time zone
offset does not affect the time stamps that are used with historical data.
6. From the menu bar, select Actions > Modify.
CMS adjust the time setting of the ACD by the value specified. The status bar will display a
Successful message when the operation is complete.
Note:
Note:
The CMS time reverts to the Unix clock if the link to the ACD that is designated as
the master clock stops functioning. Even if the link begins to function normally, the
only way CMS will reset back to the master clock is to either:
- Turn CMS off and then on
- Reboot the server
7. Restart data collection. See Changing the data collection state on page 434 for information
on this procedure.
8. Return CMS to multi-user mode. See Changing the CMS state on page 431 for information
on this procedure.
478
Administration
July 2007
Storage intervals
CMS must be in single-user mode and the data collection must be off before modifications
to these settings can be made.
Perform a full backup of historical data before making changes to the data collection times
or dates. After the changes are made, perform another full backup of historical data.
When a weekly report is requested, the date entered must correspond to the day of the
week specified in the Week start day field.
!
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not open another Storage Intervals window and attempt to change other
settings while modifying these settings. Doing so can result in the loss of
database tables.
Steps
To modify the CMS date and time settings for data summarizing:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
Administration
July 2007
479
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Storage Intervals window.
5. In the Data summarizing time: field, enter the time when CMS should summarize data for
the previous day, week, and month. The time must be entered in one of the following
formats:
If you do not wish to change this field, skip this step and proceed to the next.
The time entered in this field must be equal to or greater to intrahour interval in order to
allow CMS to finish archiving data. The default time for this field is 12:35 AM.
Weekly summaries are started on the day following the day specified in the Week stop
day field. Monthly summaries are started on the first day of the next month. For example,
the monthly summary for January is done on the first day of February.
To run data summarizing on the day for which data was collected, the Data summarizing
time: field must be set for 15 minutes after the Daily stop time and prior to midnight. For
example, the Data summarizing time: field can be set to 11:59 PM or 23:59. This
would require that the Daily stop time: field be set to 11:44 PM or 23:44.
6. In the Week start day (Select one): group, select the day that represents the start of the
work week for the contact center.
If you do not wish to change this field, skip this step and proceed to the next.
The default value for this field is Sunday.
480
Administration
July 2007
Storage intervals
7. In the Week stop day (Select one): group, select the day that represents the end of the
work week for the contact center.
If you do not wish to change this field, skip this step and proceed to the next.
The default value for this field is Saturday. Data through the end of the stop day is
collected and included in the weekly summary.
When the start or stop day is changed for the week, the data from the old start day through
the new stop day for the week is archived.
If possible, make any changes to the Week start day and Week stop day after CMS
performs the weekly archive. This change is not possible for a seven-day week. When the
start and stop day for the week are changed, the current week will contain the data item,
INCOMPLETE, to indicate that the data for this week is peculiar since the definition of that
week was changed.
If the Week start day and Week stop day are identical, data for only one day will be
collected for that week.
8. In the Daily start time: field, enter the time at which data collection should start. Enter the
time in one of the following formats:
If you do not wish to change this field, skip this step and proceed to the next.
The default value for this field is 12:00 AM (midnight).
9. In the Daily stop time: field, enter the time at which data collection should stop. Enter the
time in one of the formats specified in the previous step.
If you do not wish to change this field, skip this step and proceed to the next.
The default value for this field is 11:59 PM. Data is collected through the end of the
minute specified.
Do not enter the same time in this field as in the Daily start time: field. Doing so will result
in data being collected for only one minute per day.
10. From the menu bar, select Actions > Modify.
CMS updates the data summarizing parameters as specified. A Successful message
appears in the status bar when CMS completes the operation.
11. Restart data collection. See Changing the data collection state on page 434 for information
on this procedure.
12. Return CMS to multi-user mode. See Changing the CMS state on page 431 for information
on this procedure.
Administration
July 2007
481
Switch setup
Use the Switch Setup window to view the following information:
Communication Manager setup information - ACD name, release, and activated features,
such as Call Vectoring, Call Prompting, and Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
The Switch Setup window can only display real ACDs. Pseudo-ACDs are not supported.
This window can only be used to view information. No modifications to the ACD can be
made through Supervisor.
The phantom abandon call timer is used to determine which calls to count as abandoned
calls rather than ACD call. If the call lasts less than the number of seconds specified, the
Communication Manager system considers it an abandoned call. The feature is useful in
areas where the central office does not provide disconnect supervision on trunks.
To display an ACD name in the Switch Setup window, it must first have the name
assigned in the Dictionary. See Adding an ACD name on page 58 for more information on
this procedure.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
482
To view ACDs in the Switch Setup window, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor
session requires read permission for the CMS System Setup feature.
Administration
July 2007
Switch setup
Steps
To view the setup settings for an ACD:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
Administration
July 2007
483
4. In the ACD: field, enter the name or number of the ACD to display.
To have all ACDs returned from the query so that you can cycle through them in this
dialog, leave this field blank and proceed to the next step.
5. From the menu bar, select Actions > Find one.
Supervisor displays the setup information for the specified ACD. If more than one match
was found, use the Next and Previous items under Actions menu to cycle through them.
Steps
To view the setup settings for all ACDs:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > System Setup....
Supervisor displays the CMS System Setup window.
484
Administration
July 2007
Switch setup
3. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Switch Setup window.
Administration
July 2007
485
486
Administration
July 2007
Assign a name and description to the full path name for a device used for data backups
Monitor the data link between the CMS server and the switch
Administration
July 2007
487
ACD status
The ACD Status window displays information about the current selected ACD, including the
number of splits or skills, agents logged in, trunk groups, trunks, VDNs, vectors (if your
company has purchased Call Vectoring), and measured splits. You can also use the ACD status
window to request a complete set of translations from a specific ACD. The ACD status window
will look different if your switch has Expert Agent Selection (EAS).
This section contains the following topics:
The link must be up between the Communication Manager system and the CMS, if you
want to view the status or request translations from a specific ACD.
Data collection must be on for the specific ACD for the translations you request.
The data will be lost during a translations pump-up. An acknowledgement window will ask
if you want to proceed.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure you wish to perform, you will need the following permissions:
488
To view the ACD Status window, you need to have read permission for the Maintenance
subsystem.
To request translations, you need to have write permission for the Maintenance
subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
ACD status
Administration
July 2007
489
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the ACD Status window.
If your Communication Manager system does not have EAS, Supervisor displays the
following window:
If your Communication Manager has EAS, Supervisor displays the following window:
For additional information on the fields in the ACD Status window, see Description of the
ACD Status window - with EAS on page 493 and Description of the ACD Status window without EAS on page 494.
5. Perform one of the following steps to enter information in the ACD(s): field:
490
Administration
July 2007
ACD status
Note:
Enter the name or number of the ACD directly into the field.
Note:
You can also select an ACD Group which will return all the members of that
group.
6. From the Actions menu, select Find one.
Supervisor displays the ACD Status window for the selected ACD.
If you selected an ACD Group, the first member of the group is displayed. View any other
member ACDs by using the Next and Previous buttons.
Administration
July 2007
491
492
Administration
July 2007
ACD status
The following table provides the descriptions of the fields on the ACD Status window where
Expert Agent Selection (EAS) is installed:
Field
Description
Skills
Trunk groups
Trunks
VDNs
Vectors
Errors
Administration
July 2007
493
The following table provides the descriptions of the fields on the ACD Status window where
Expert Agent Selection (EAS) is not installed:
494
Field
Description
CMS is measuring
Splits
Total split
members
The agent/split pairs logged in at the time the ACD Status window
was opened.
Trunk groups
Trunks
VDNs
Vectors
Measured splits
Errors
Administration
July 2007
Archiving status
Important:
This functionality was available for Generic 2 and System 85 switches and is no
longer needed when your CMS server is connected to a Communication Manager
system. ACD translations are downloaded automatically when changes are made
to measured contact center entities.
Important:
If you request an ACD translation, contact center data is interrupted on the
Communication Manager system and can result in inaccurate reports.
Important:
Important:
Archiving status
Use the Archiving Status window to display the status, date, and time of the last archive for
interval, daily, weekly, and monthly data. This information can help you decide when to turn off
data collection or change your archiving times to minimize data loss.
This information can help you decide when to turn off data collection or change your archiving
times without losing data.
This section contains the following topics:
Archive indicates that CMS is storing interval, daily, weekly, and monthly data in the
appropriate database tables.
Administration
July 2007
495
Permissions
You need read permission for the Maintenance subsystem to view the Archiving Status
window.
496
Administration
July 2007
Archiving status
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Archiving Status window.
5. Perform one of the following steps to enter information in the ACD(s): field:
Enter the name or number of the ACD directly into the field.
6. In the Archiving type (Select any you wish): check boxes, deselect the archives you do
not want to view. If you want to view all archive types, leave the check boxes as check
marked and proceed to the next step.
7. From the Actions menu, select List all.
Supervisor displays the Archiving Status - List All window.
For more detailed information about the Archiving Status - List All window, see
Description of the Archiving Status - List All window on page 499.
Note:
Note:
It is also possible to view the archiving status of all members of a single ACD
Group using this procedure. Instead of the name or number of a single ACD,
enter the name or number of the ACD Group in the ACD: field.
Administration
July 2007
497
5. If the ACD(s): field is not clear; go to the Edit menu, and select Clear all.
6. Select the type of archives you want to view in the Archiving type: check boxes.
498
Administration
July 2007
Archiving status
For more detailed information about the Archiving Status - List All window, see
Description of the Archiving Status - List All window on page 499.
Administration
July 2007
499
Field descriptions
The following table lists the fields and the associated descriptions for the
Archiving Status - List All window:
Field
Description
Status
Date
Time
Next scheduled
Backup/restore devices
Use the Backup/Restore Devices window to assign a name and description to a full path name
for a device. The device name is used for data backup, data migration, data restore, and for
loading a pseudo-ACD.
The LAN Backup feature of CMS is not available through the Supervisor interface. For more
information regarding this feature, see the Avaya Call Management System LAN Backup User
Guide.
This section contains the following topics:
500
Administration
July 2007
Backup/restore devices
Permissions
Depending on the procedure you wish to perform, you need the following permissions:
You need read permission for the Maintenance subsystem to view the Backup/Restore
Devices window.
You need write permission for the Maintenance subsystem to add, delete or modify any
backup/restore devices.
Administration
July 2007
501
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Backup/Restore Devices window.
6. If more than one match is found, go to the Actions menu, and select Next. Repeat this
step until all devices have been displayed.
502
Administration
July 2007
Backup/restore devices
Administration
July 2007
503
504
Administration
July 2007
Backup/restore devices
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Backup/Restore Devices window.
5. In the Device name: field, enter the name of the backup/restore device.
If you want to refer to your backup/restore device as ddrive1, enter ddrive1 in the Device
name: field.
6. In the Path: field, enter the full Solaris system path to access the device.
See the Accessing devices section in your Solaris System Administrator's Guide for more
information about devices and paths.
7. In the Description: field, enter any additional information to help identify the device.
8. In the Device type: option list, select the correct tape capacity for your backup/restore
device.
Selecting the correct capacity tape allows the system to estimate the number of tapes that
will be needed to perform a full backup to the device.
9. From the Actions menu, select Add.
The device is defined through CMS and can be used for backup and restore operations.
Administration
July 2007
505
5. Perform one of the following procedures to select the correct backup/restore device:
506
If you know the name of the device, enter the name of the device in the Device name:
field and then press the Enter key.
If you do not know the name of the device, perform the following steps:
Administration
July 2007
Backup/restore devices
Administration
July 2007
507
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Backup/Restore Devices window.
5. Perform one of the following procedures to select the correct backup/restore device:
If you know the name of the device, enter the name of the device in the Device name:
field and then press the Enter key.
If you do not know the name of the device, perform the following steps:
1. From the Actions menu, select Find one.
2. If more than one match is found, go to the Actions menu, and select Next. Repeat
this step until the device you want to delete is displayed in the dialog box.
Data Backup
There are two types of data backup available through CMS, CMSADM and Maintenance. Avaya
CMS can backup and restore while the data collection remains on. This ability helps minimize
data loss. However, once a CMSADM backup is started, new logins through the ASCII interface,
through Avaya CMS Supervisor, and through Avaya Visual Vectors are blocked. A maintenance
restore of CMS System Administration data or ACD Administration data requires Avaya CMS to
be in single-user mode.
The LAN Backup feature of CMS is not available through the Supervisor interface. For more
information regarding this feature, see the Avaya Call Management System LAN Backup User
Guide.
This section contains the following topics:
508
Administration
July 2007
Data Backup
CMSADM backup
The CMSADM backup saves all of the system data on the computer onto a tape.
The CMSADM backup includes the following data:
CMS programs
The CMSADM backup will not save CMS database tables. For complete data recovery, both
CMSADM and maintenance backups are required.
This type of backup is only performed through the CMS ASCII interface. A Supervisor interface
for this type of backup is not available.
Maintenance backup
Maintenance backups are used to archive and restore CMS data. If you do not have a backup,
data is lost and cannot be recovered in the event of system or disk failure. The frequency of
your backups is determined by how much data your contact center is willing to lose.
Through Supervisor, you can use the Backup Data operation on the Maintenance window to
perform full and incremental backups of CMS historical and administration data.
Administration
July 2007
509
Tape description
Platform name
DAT 72
DDS-4
Amount of data - An increase in the amount of data will cause an increase in the amount of
time it takes to back up or restore the data. Some factors that will increase the amount of
data being stored are:
- Number of items being measured - CMS R3V9 and later have increased capacities.
More data is generated if you measure 100,000 agent skill pairs instead of 10,000.
510
Administration
July 2007
Data Backup
- Number of days information is stored - The greater the data storage time, the greater
the amount of data that will have to be backed up or restored. When the CMS system
reaches a predetermined threshold for data storage, the oldest record is deleted so
that the newest record can be stored. Twice the amount of data is stored if you set
your data storage for 62 days instead of 31 days.
- Interval size - Shorter intervals generate more data. A 15 minute interval will generate
significantly more data than a 60 minute interval.
System load - Processes that require a large amount of system resources will slow down
the CMS system. Backing up data requires a large amount of system resources. Additional
processes that require a large amount of system resources are:
- Running reports - Running a single large report or multiple smaller reports will use a
large amount of system resources.
- Archiving data - Archiving a large amount of data will use a large amount of system
resources.
Necessity for manually changing backup tapes - If the amount of data exceeds the
capacity of a single backup tape, someone must monitor the system and manually load
additional tapes. A data backup or restore will not finish unless someone is able to load
tapes into the tape device as needed.
Select the maximum interval time that will meet your data collection needs.
Select the minimum data storage times that will meet your data collection needs for all the
historical database tables.
Run reports when the CMS system is not actively backing up or restoring data.
Schedule routine backups to occur at a time that is different from data archiving.
Reduce the amount of data being stored so only one backup tape is needed to store the
data.
Upgrade your CMS system to a more powerful hardware platform or add additional
memory and CPUs.
Administration
July 2007
511
After the CMS is provisioned (Never use the original tapes made during provisioning.)
After the system has been set up in the factory (performed by factory personnel).
This backup contains the default factory configuration. These tapes should be saved if the
system must be reinstalled in the field.
!
Important:
Important:
Use a new set of backup tapes for the monthly CMSADM backup. Do NOT use
the original sets of factory backup tapes or provisioning backup tapes. Make sure
that there are enough tapes for the new backup.
Prior to running a cmsadm backup, it is recommended that you restart the CMS server.
Verify that you are using the correct tape for the tape drive on your system.
Backup tapes can wear out. Be sure to refresh your supply of backup tapes at appropriate
intervals.
Permissions
In order to perform a CMSADM backup you need write permission for the Unix (r) subsystem.
Only employees with administrative responsibilities should be given the permissions and
passwords.
512
Administration
July 2007
Data Backup
Steps
1. Log into the Solaris system as root and open a terminal window.
See Logging in to CMS from the server console on page 572 for additional information.
2. Verify that the computer is in a Solaris multi-user state (2 or 3). To check if you are in the
multi-user state, enter:
who -r
3. Enter the following command and press the Enter key:
cmsadm
The Avaya Call Management System Administration Menu is displayed:
4. Enter the number associated with the backup option.
Depending on the configuration of your system, one of the following outputs occurs.
a.
b. If more than one tape drive is available for use by the system, the system displays a
list of tape devices. Enter a tape drive selection from the displayed list.
The system displays the following message:
Please insert the first cartridge tape into <device name>
Press ENTER when ready or Del to quit:^?
If you receive the message displayed above, insert the next tape and allow it to rewind.
When it is properly positioned, press the Enter key.
6. When the backup is completed, the system displays information according to the number
of tapes that are required for the backup:
If the number of tapes required is one, the system displays the following message:
xxxxxxx blocks
Tape Verification
xxxxxxx blocks
WARNING: A CMS Full Maintenance Backup in addition to this cmsadm backup
must be done to have a complete backup of the system. . . . .
Please label the backup tape(s) with the date and the current CMS version
(Rxxxxx.x)
If the number of tapes required is more than one, the system displays the following
message:
xxxxxxx blocks
Administration
July 2007
513
Tape Verification
Insert the first tape
Press Return to proceed :
If you receive the message displayed above, insert the first tape used in the backup and
press the Enter key. Wait for the tape drive light-emitting diode (LED) to stop blinking
before you remove the tape. When prompted, repeat this process for any additional tapes
generated by the backup process.
When the final tape is verified, CMS displays the following message:
xxxxxxx blocks
Tape Verification
xxxxxxx blocks
WARNING: A CMS Full Maintenance Backup in addition to this cmsadm backup
must be done to have a complete backup of the system. . . . .
Please label the backup tape(s) with the date and the current CMS version
(Rxxxxx.x)
Tape number
Date of backup
8. Set the tape write-protect switch to read-only and put the tapes in a safe location.
If you have problems performing a CMSADM backup, see the document, Software
Installation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting.
514
A sufficient supply of tapes should be available so that tapes can be rotated. One common
plan is to keep seven tapes in stock and recycle them daily. A new tape is used each day
of the week, and each week the sequence is repeated.
Backups run in the background. You can exit the Backup Data window without affecting
the backup.
Running backups during archiving may cause performance problems. For best
performance, run backups either before or after the archiving process.
Most systems come equipped with tape drives that can accommodate a full backup on one
tape. Incremental backups may not need to be done. Full backups can be scheduled to run
every day.
Administration
July 2007
Data Backup
!
Important:
Important:
The maintenance backup does not back up the CMS software, Solaris system
files or non-CMS customer data on the system. For complete data recovery, both
CMSADM and maintenance backups are required. See Performing a CMSADM
backup on page 512 for instructions on how to run a CMSADM backup.
Permissions
To run a Maintenance backup you need write permission to the Maintenance subsystem.
Steps
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > Maintenance.
Supervisor displays the Maintenance window.
To back up a single ACD, enter the ACD identification in the ACD: field.
To back up all ACDs, make sure no ACDs are selected in the ACD: field.
Administration
July 2007
515
5. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Backup Data window.
6. In the Device name: field, verify that the correct backup device is displayed. If you need to
select another device, select List devices from the Actions menu.
7. Ensure that the Verify tape can be read after backup?: check box is selected.
It is recommended that the tape backup be checked for readability. When the tape is being
verified, a message displays in the Status: field. If the tape cannot be read a message
displays in the Errors: field. See Common backup error messages on page 519 for
information on additional error messages you may receive.
8. In the ACD(s) to back up: field, select one of the following options:
The All ACD(s) option will back up data from all real ACDs (not pseudo-ACDs).
The Current ACD option will back up data from the ACD that is displayed in the
bottom right corner of the Backup Data window.
9. The Data to back up: check boxes, by default, are all selected. If you do not want to back
up the maximum amount of data, deselect the types of data you do not want backed up.
For an explanation of the Data to back up: check box options, see Description of the
Backup Data window on page 517.
10. From the Actions menu, select Run.
The backup process begins. When the backup process is complete, Supervisor displays
an acknowledgement window.
If your backup requires more than one tape, you will receive a message telling you to
mount another volume to complete the backup.
11. When the backup completes, remove and label the tape(s).
516
Administration
July 2007
Data Backup
Field descriptions
Fields in the Backup Data window are described as follows:
Administration
Field
Description
Status
Errors
Device name
July 2007
517
Field
Description
518
Check Box
Description
Local System
administration data
CMS System
administration data
ACD-specific
administration data
Historical data
Administration
July 2007
Data Backup
Check Box
Description
Non-CMS data
Includes all data from Informix tables with names that start
with c_. The table definitions for non-CMS Informix tables
are not backed up, these would be captured by a CMSADM
backup.
Specific tables
Solution
Mount a volume.
Administration
July 2007
519
An acknowledgement window displays the final backup information. If the backup was
scheduled on a timetable, the information is recorded in the Maintenance Error Log.
Code
Meaning
CMS
System name
NNNNNN
NN
LLLL
NN
NN
Recovery kit
The recovery kit is composed of the backup media that the Avaya Technical Services
Organization will need to restore service to your system if major problems occur. This kit should
be stored in a secure location in order to minimize the time your system is out of service.
520
Administration
July 2007
Restoring data
Full Maintenance backup tape and any Incremental backup tapes since the latest full
backup
All the software packages that were shipped with the CMS system.
Restoring data
Use the Restore Data window to restore CMS data that has been lost due to system failure,
disk crashes, or power outages. You can restore all CMS data files that you have previously
backed up. You can also select which ACDs and CMS data to restore.
The automatic restore will restore all CMS data files from your last backup. Most data is
restored by the automatic restore procedure.
The manual restore will restore specific CMS data files. The manual restore is used only when
a select number of database tables need to be restored. A manual restore gives you control
over which data is restored.
This section contains the following topics:
The Data Collection and CMS states must be set as noted for the following backups:
- Local system administration data - Data Collection off; CMS Single-user mode
- CMS system administration data - Data Collection on or off; CMS Single-user mode
- ACD system administration data - Data Collection on or off; CMS Single-user mode
Administration
July 2007
521
- Historical data, Non-CMS data, or specific tables - Data Collection on or off; CMS
Single- or Multi-user mode.
Data must be backed up before it can be restored. To ensure the safety of your data, you
should frequently back up your system.
The restore procedure is run in the background. The Status field on the Restore Data
window allows you to monitor the status of the restore process as it is performed.
You can turn CMS back to multi-user mode when the Status field displays Restore is
complete.
Permissions
To restore data you need write permission for the Maintenance subsystem.
Automatic restore
To have CMS automatically restore data from a backup:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > Maintenance.
Supervisor displays the Maintenance window.
522
Administration
July 2007
Restoring data
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Restore Data window.
The Status: field shows the status of the current restore or a previous restore if one has
taken place.
The Errors: field will show any errors found during the restore.
5. Check the Device name: field to make sure the correct backup/restore device is selected.
If you want to use another backup/restore device, select Actions > List devices. Enter
the correct backup/restore device name in the Device name: field.
This field defaults to the device named during installation.
6. Select the Restore from last backup: check box.
7. From the Actions menu, select Run.
The system notifies you which volumes to mount to restore the data. At the end of every
restored volume, the tables that have been fully or partially restored will be displayed.
If the system asks for a tape that you cannot provide, you must cancel the restore process.
The restore can be rerun if the tape is found.
Administration
July 2007
523
Manual restore
!
Important:
Important:
The manual restore stops when severe errors occur or when you tell it there are
no more volumes to restore. Select Stop to tell the restore process that you are
finished. Do not select Cancel since it implies an abnormal termination.
Cancelling a restore leaves the data that has already been restored in the tables,
which may result in the database being in an abnormal state. You will receive an
acknowledgment window asking if you are sure you want to cancel the restore.
524
Administration
July 2007
Restoring data
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Restore Data window.
The Status: field shows the status of the current restore or a previous restore if one has
taken place.
The Errors: field will show any errors found during the restore.
5. Check the Device name: field to ensure that the correct backup/restore device is selected.
If you want to use another backup/restore device, select Actions > List devices. Enter
the correct backup/restore device name in the Device name: field.
This field defaults to the device named during installation.
!
Important:
Important:
Do not select the Restore from last backup: check box. A manual restore will
accept any tape you mount as long as the data on the tape corresponds with the
requested data.
6. In the Start date: field, enter the oldest date to be included in the restore by using one of
the following methods:
Enter the date in relative format; for example, 0 for today and -1 for yesterday.
Administration
July 2007
525
7. In the Start time: field, enter the time you want to start restoring data. Use the format of
hh:mm XM when entering the time where hh is hours, mm is minutes, and XM is AM or PM.
If you wanted to restore data starting at 1:15 AM, you would enter 01:15 AM
If AM or PM is not specified, a 24 hour clock is assumed.
8. In the Stop date: field, enter the most recent date to be included in the restore.
9. In the Stop time: field, enter the time you want to stop restoring data. Use the format of
hh:mm XM when entering the time.
10. In the ACD(s) to restore options, select either All ACDs or Current ACD.
11. In the Data to restore: group, select the types of data you want to restore.
12. If you do not select Specific tables, go to Step 16. Otherwise, select Actions > Select
tables.
Supervisor displays the Restore Data - Select tables window.
If you are performing the Specific tables restore, you cannot restore any other information
at the same time. This includes:
- Local system administration data - This data can only be restored once. A second
attempt will corrupt data.
- CMS system administration data
- ACD system administration data
- Historical data
13. Select the tables you want to restore.
14. From the Actions menu, select Modify.
15. Close the Restore Data - Select tables window to return to the Restore Data window.
16. From the Actions menu, select Run.
526
Administration
July 2007
Connection status
Avaya offers a High Availability solution if data loss from a server restart is a concern. The
Avaya CMS High Availability (HA) solution provides an uninterrupted data stream between the
communication server and two HA CMS servers. If you use the HA solution, restart each CMS
server at a different time to prevent data loss.
Avaya support personnel who are performing system maintenance work may require you to
restart your CMS system. If Avaya support personnel require that you to restart your CMS
system, they will work with you to determine the best time to perform the restart. Avaya support
personnel will make every attempt to determine the root cause of any problem that might
require a restart.
Connection status
You can use the Connection Status window to monitor the data link between the CMS
processor and the Communication Manager system. You can also view the current status of the
application, session, and connection layers of the link between the Communication Manager
system and CMS.
This section contains the following topics:
Permissions
You need read permission for the Maintenance subsystem to view the Connection Status
window.
Administration
July 2007
527
5. In the ACD(s): field, enter the name or number of the ACD or ACD Group.
See Description of the ACD Status window - with EAS on page 493 or Description of the
ACD Status window - without EAS on page 494 for additional information about the fields
present on the Connection Status window.
528
Administration
July 2007
Connection status
Administration
July 2007
529
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Connection Status window.
See Description of the ACD Status window - with EAS on page 493 or Description of the
ACD Status window - without EAS on page 494 for additional information about the
Connection Status window fields.
5. If the ACD(s): field is not clear, select Edit > Clear all.
6. From the Actions menu select List all.
Supervisor displays the Connection Status - List All window.
530
Administration
July 2007
Connection status
Field descriptions
The Connection Status Window contains the following fields:
Field
Description
Status Messages
ACD(s)
Application
Administration
July 2007
531
Field
Description
Status Messages
Session
Connection
Date/Time
Errors
Administering a printer
Use the Printer Administration window to assign a name, description, and options to a printer
that can be used by terminals connected to CMS. Users of Supervisor do not have access to
printers assigned through this window but can use printers that are normally used through their
Windows-based PC.
532
Administration
July 2007
Administering a printer
Before you can assign a printer in the Printer Administration window, the printer must
already be administered in the Solaris system. See the Avaya CMS Terminals, Printers,
and Modems document for additional information about the Port Administration Tool.
The printer set up as the default printer will receive all terminal requested print jobs, unless
otherwise specified by the user.
If jobs are sent to a printer that is no longer administered, the print job will be sent to the
default printer and an error will be logged in the Maintenance Error Log.
The name of a printer administered in the Printer Administration window can be used by
terminal users as the default destination when printing historical reports.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure you want to perform, you will need the following permissions:
To view the Printer Administration window, you will need read permission for the
Maintenance subsystem.
To add, delete, or modify the Printer Administration window, you will need write
permission for the Maintenance subsystem.
Administration
July 2007
533
5. In the CMS printer name: field, enter the name of the new printer.
The name assigned to the printer must be unique from all other installed printers; however,
it can be assigned the same name it was given during the Solaris administration.
534
Administration
July 2007
Administering a printer
6. In the LP printer name: field, enter the name assigned to the printer when it was
administered in Solaris.
7. In the Description: field, enter any additional information to identify the printer.
8. If the printer uses IBM graphic characters, select the IBM graphic characters: check box.
Otherwise, leave the check box deselected.
9. In the Lines per page: field, enter the number of lines that fit on a page.
The default is 66 lines. CMS formats reports to correspond to the value in this field.
10. In the Print type: options select one of the following choices:
Select Other. Then, in the corresponding field, enter the specific print type such as
pica, elite, or compressed.
11. If you want a banner to be printed for every print job, select the Banners: check box.
A banner is a cover sheet that identifies the user who requested the print job.
12. From the Actions menu, select Add.
Administration
July 2007
535
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Printer Administration window.
536
Administration
July 2007
Administering a printer
Administration
If you know the name of the printer, enter the name of the printer in the CMS printer
name: field, and then press the Enter key.
July 2007
537
If you do not know the name of the printer, perform the following:
1. From the Actions menu, select Find one.
2. If more than one match is found, go to the Actions menu, and select Next. Repeat
this step until the printer you want to modify is displayed.
!
Important:
Important:
You cannot modify the name of a CMS printer. If you want to change a printer
name, you must delete the printer and add it again with a new name. See
Deleting a printer on page 538, and Adding a new printer on page 534 for more
information.
6. Make changes to any of the fields in the Printer Administration window, except the CMS
printer name: field
7. From the Actions menu, select Modify.
Deleting a printer
To delete a printer currently defined on a CMS server:
1. From the Controller window, select Tools > Maintenance.
Supervisor displays the Maintenance window.
538
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Printer Administration window.
If you know the name of the printer, enter the name of the printer in the CMS printer
name: field, and then press Enter.
If you do not know the name of the printer, perform the following:
1. From the Actions menu, select Find one.
2. If more than one match is found, go to the Actions menu, and select Next. Repeat
this step until the printer you want to delete is displayed.
Administration
July 2007
539
The Maintenance Error Log can contain 500 entries. When the log reaches 500 records
the next record will overwrite the oldest record.
The entries in the Maintenance Error Log are displayed in chronological order, starting with
the most recent entry.
The results of all archives and backups are written to the Maintenance Error Log.
If you have Avaya CMS Forecast, the results of the Forecast Manager are written to the
Maintenance Error Log.
540
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the Maintenance Error Log window.
5. In the ACD: drop down list, enter the ACD on which you want to see an error log or select
All to include all ACDs. Selecting an ACD Group shows the error logs for only the member
ACDs of that group.
6. If the Error codes: field is blank, all error codes are displayed in the error log report. If you
only want the report to include specific error codes, enter the necessary codes in the Error
codes: field.
7. In the Severities: drop down list, enter the severity of errors you want to see the report or
select All Severities to include errors of any severity.
See Severity of errors on page 542 for additional information on error code classifications.
8. In the Dates: field, enter the amount of time that the report will include through one of the
following methods:
Enter the date in relative format; for example, 0 for today, -1 for yesterday.
To display the Maintenance Error Log on the monitor, select View Report on Screen.
Administration
July 2007
541
See Maintenance Error Log messages on page 542 for additional definitions for the
possible error messages.
Severity of errors
The following list describes the error classifications in the Maintenance Error Log:
ALARM - This type of entry could cause the system to crash or fail. You must work with
Avaya Services to avoid the possibility of system failure.
ERROR - This type of entry needs immediate action. For example, a backup may not be
working properly.
INFO - This type of entry does not need immediate action but is listed either to let you
know that some aspect of the system is not operating correctly or to indicate the status of
an operation. For example, Successful.
542
Administration
July 2007
The following table lists the possible error codes as well as the related information:
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
500
505
505
555
556
556
Administration
July 2007
543
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
556
557
557
1001
1001
1001
1001
544
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1001
1050
1053
1100
1302
Administration
July 2007
545
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1302
1302
1350
1350
1350
546
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1350
1350
1350
1350
1350
Administration
July 2007
547
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1350
1350
1350
1350
1351
1351
548
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1351
1351
1351
1351
Administration
July 2007
549
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1351
1351
1351
1351
1400
550
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1404
1404
1404
Administration
July 2007
551
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1404
1404
552
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1406
1407
1409
1409
1501
Administration
July 2007
553
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1600
1600
1700
1701
1702
554
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
Administration
July 2007
555
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1708
1709
1710
1711
1711
1711
BACKUP INFO:
556
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1750
1751
1800
1801
Administration
July 2007
557
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
558
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1850
1851
1900
1900
1901
1901
Administration
July 2007
559
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1901
1901
1901
1901
1901
560
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
1901
1901
1901
1902
1902
1902
1902
Administration
July 2007
561
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
562
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
2100
2200
2300
2300
2400
2500
2600
Administration
July 2007
563
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
2600
2600
2700
2701
2702
564
Administration
July 2007
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
2703
2706
2708
Administration
July 2007
565
Error Code
Message
Reason/Action
2750
2751
566
Administration
July 2007
The maximum capacity for the log is set at 30,000 records and cannot be changed. When
the table size exceeds 30,000 records, the 100 oldest records will be deleted.
The historical database items of the CMS ACD Administration Log is not available for use
with the Avaya CMS Supervisor Report Designer tool. The Supervisor File menu option for
this report will not display the Designer option. It will, however, behave in the same
manner as drill-down reports.
Permissions
To view the ACD Administration Log report, the user ID used to log in to this Supervisor session
requires read permission for the Maintenance subsystem.
!
Important:
Administration
Important:
If the ACD Administration Log report is run to display all 30,000 records, your PC
should have no less than 200 MB of free disk space to allow for the caching of
this data.
July 2007
567
568
Administration
July 2007
4. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the ACD Administration Log window.
The height of this dialog box varies according to the current screen resolution of your PC.
A higher screen resolution results in more fields being displayed.
For a description of the ACD Administration Log window fields, see ACD Administration
Log window field descriptions on page 570 for additional information.
5. In the available fields, enter the data to use in the report. The data can also be selected
through the drop-down history lists or through the Browse buttons.
The more fields that you specify, the more restricted the data will be that is used in the
report. If all of the input fields are left blank, all records will be displayed.
6. In the Destination group, select one of the following output options:
Print Report on: - The report is sent to the specified printer. Any printer available to
the PC can be used and selected through the button at the right of the field.
Administration
July 2007
569
7. Select OK.
Supervisor displays the ACD Administration Log Report with the specified data.
570
Field
Description
Dates:
Times:
ACDs(n):
VDNs(n):
Vectors(n):
Agents(n):
Administration
July 2007
Logging in to CMS
This section contains procedures for logging in to CMS through methods other than using
Supervisor. Some administrators will need to do this in order to access capabilities not available
through the Supervisor interface.
This section contains the following topics:
Administration
July 2007
571
!
Important:
Important:
Do not allow users to share the same login ID as this action will use up Solaris
system processes.
Steps
1. At the Login: prompt, enter your login ID.
The Password: prompt is displayed.
2. Enter your password.
A prompt for the terminal type is displayed.
3. Enter your terminal type.
If you use a login other than cms, CMS will automatically open to the CMS Main Menu.
If cms is used as the login, you will have to enter cms a second time at the $ prompt before
the Main Menu will be displayed
!
Important:
Important:
Users who use a /usr/bin/cms shell will not be able to log in to CMS through
the Common Desktop Environment (CDE).
To remedy this problem, you can either use the /usr/bin/ksh shell or use a
command line login. The command line login will not use the CDE.
572
Administration
July 2007
Logging in to CMS
Steps
To log in to CMS at the server:
1. If the server has just been rebooted or inactive for an extended period of time, the console
may be password-protected. If this is the case, unlock the console by entering your
authorized username (if necessary) and password in the appropriate login console fields.
Solaris displays the CDE interface.
If the CMS XTERM option is displayed in the Workspace Menu, you can open an
xterm window directly by selecting that option.
If the CMS XTERM option is not displayed, choose Tools > Terminal from the
Workspace Menu to open a terminal window. At the command prompt, enter xterm
to open an xterm window.
Administration
July 2007
573
Administering passwords
For system security, passwords are required for all CMS user login IDs. If a password is not
entered on your first login, the system will prevent you from continuing until one is supplied.
CMS users can enter and change their passwords, but only a CMS administrator working on the
Sun Microsystems, Inc. Solaris system can replace a forgotten password.
This section contains the following topics:
Password administration should only be done by an administrator with the password for
the root user.
Forcing a password change and administering the Password Aging feature can only be
done through the CMS ASCII interface. The ASCII interface is available through the
following methods:
- A Terminal Emulator connection to the CMS server
- A telnet session to the CMS server
- Direct interaction with the CMS server
Users should choose a password with no less than six characters. The password must
have at least one character as a number or special character and have a minimum of two
alphabetic characters.
When changing a password, the new password must have at least three characters that
are different from the previous password.
See Chapter 9: Administering user permissions on page 355 for more information on special
characters.
574
Administration
July 2007
Administering passwords
Steps
If a user forgets their password, perform the following procedure:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, highlight the Commands Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
CMS displays the Commands menu.
2. Select UNIX (r) system.
The screen clears and a $ prompt is displayed.
3. Enter the following command:
su
4. At the Password: prompt, enter the root password.
The # prompt is displayed.
5. Enter the following command:
passwd <userid>
Where <userid> is the ID of the user who needs a new password.
Solaris displays a prompt for the new password.
6. Enter a new password for the user.
Solaris displays the # prompt.
7. Enter the following command:
passwd -f <userid>
Where <userid> is the ID of the user with a new password.
Solaris displays the # prompt.
The passwd -f command will force the user to change their password the next time they
log in to CMS.
8. Enter the following command:
exit
Solaris displays the $ prompt.
Administration
July 2007
575
Important:
If you have a custom configuration from the Avaya Professional Services
Organization (PSO) or use third-party applications on your CMS server, you must
contact the PSO before enabling the password aging feature so that
customizations are not affected. The PSO can be contacted through the technical
support telephone number.
The following items should be read and understood before attempting to change the password
aging feature:
The number of weeks that pass before a password change is required can range from 1 to
52 weeks. The default value for this feature is 9 weeks.
The password aging feature is only available through the cmsadm menu in the ASCII
interface of CMS. This feature is not accessible through Avaya CMS Supervisor.
Steps
For more information and procedures for administering the password aging feature, see Avaya
Call Management System Software Installation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting Guide.
576
Administration
July 2007
Note:
Note:
It is recommended that you use the port administration tool instead of the Solaris
tools to administer terminals, printers, and modems. The port administration tool
keeps a record of all administrative activity in a format that is more structured
than the Solaris tools. Once you start using the port administration tool, you
should consistently use it for all port administration.
Administration
July 2007
577
578
Administration
July 2007
Terminal Emulator
Timetables
A timetable is a CMS feature that enables the scheduling of one or more administrative tasks.
Each timetable can consist of up to 100 tasks and can be scheduled to run at any specific time.
When you are creating a timetable, CMS records the tasks you perform and includes them in
the timetable. This feature is similar to macros in many PC applications that perform multiple
tasks or actions when the single macro is run.
Timetables are better suited for mission-critical tasks than Supervisor scripts. This is due to the
fact that scripts reside on the PC where they were created. If network difficulties occur or if the
PC where the script resides is powered down, the script cannot run. Timetables run directly on
the CMS server and do not suffer from such problems.
This section contains the following topics:
Administration
July 2007
579
General
You cannot schedule real-time reports, Vector Contents, or custom report creation through
a timetable.
Timetables that fail at some point during execution are logged in the Maintenance Error
Log Report.
You can have tasks associated with different ACDs in the same timetable.
Do not create a timetable that attempts to write a file in the home directory of different user.
The ACD that is currently selected when a timetable task is created will be the ACD on
which the task runs. To change the ACD, you must delete the task and reset the current
ACD before adding the correct task.
When a CMS user is deleted, any timetables associated with that user ID are also deleted.
For this reason, it is recommended that mission-critical timetables be created under the
cms user ID.
Printing
580
You cannot select the terminal as the destination for report output through a timetable.
To print a report more than once from a timetable, you must enter a task for each copy of
the report.
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
Print jobs from timetables go to the default printer for the user who owns the timetable
unless otherwise specified when the timetable is created. If the default printer for a user is
changed, there is no need to edit the timetable as CMS automatically sends the print jobs
from the timetable to the new default printer.
If a user specifies a printer other than their default printer for a timetable task and that
printer is out of service, the timetable will not execute.
If the printer jams while attempting to print timetable tasks, you must resubmit the request
that did not print.
Backups
Timetables for incremental and full backups are created when the system is installed, but
are not scheduled.
Be sure to schedule backups to run either before archiving begins or after archiving has
been completed.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
To view timetables, the user ID used to log in to this CMS session requires read
permission for the Timetables feature, the requested CMS actions, and any ACD entities
accessed by the timetable.
To add, delete, or modify timetables, the user ID used to log in to this CMS session
requires write permission for the Timetables feature.
Users who are not Administrators can view and copy timetables from other users, but they
cannot add, delete, or modify the timetables or the task entries.
Users with Administrator permissions can add, delete, and modify timetables created by
other users.
If a timetable contains tasks for which the user does not have adequate permissions, the
timetable will fail.
Administration
July 2007
581
Steps
To create a timetable:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
Depending on the connection method to the CMS interface, this action can be
accomplished through the following methods:
3. In the Timetable name: field, enter a unique name for this timetable. The name of the
timetable cannot be changed after it has been created. Every timetable must have a
unique name.
The following list provides the types of characters that can be entered in this field:
582
Underscore (_)
Blank ( )
Comma (,)
Period (.)
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
HH AM/PM
HH:MM AM/PM
If AM/PM is not specified, CMS assumes that the time entered is in the 24-hour format.
7. In the Start date: field, enter the date on which the timetable will begin running.
Use one of the following formats for entering the date in this field:
MM/DD/YY - For example, 12/12/01. Do not enter four-digits years in this field.
Relative format - For example, entering a 1 specifies the timetable will begin one day
from today (tomorrow).
Important:
If you do not wish to schedule the time table at this point, leave the Start time:
and Start date: fields blank, ensure an x is in the Once field, and skip ahead to
Step 11.
Important:
8. In the Frequency and attributes: group, choose from the following options:
Once - This option runs the timetable one time for the date and time specified in the
Start time: and Start date: fields. This is the default value for this field group.
Dates: - This option runs the timetable on specific dates. Enter the dates in the fields
provided for this option.
Hourly - This option runs the timetable each hour. In the Stop time: field, enter the
time when the timetable should stop running.
Daily - This option runs the timetable on the selected days in the Hourly/Daily Days
group.
9. If the Hourly or Daily option was selected in the previous step, place an x next to the days
in the Hourly/Daily Days group for which the timetable should run.
10. Place an x in one of the following options:
Administration
Run only on this CMS server - The timetable will run only on this CMS server. If this
timetable is backed up and migrated to another CMS server, it will not run.
July 2007
583
Run on this or another CMS server - The timetable is capable of running on this or
any other CMS server. If this timetable is backed up and migrated to another CMS
server, it will function normally.
11. Press the Enter key, highlight the Add item on the action list by using the arrow keys on
the keyboard, and press Enter again.
The window displays a Working message. If the timetable name is currently present,
already exists displays on the status line and you must enter a different timetable name in
the Timetable name: field. If all entries are valid, the Main Menu displays with Keeping
Entries displayed in the border.
12. Select a task from the CMS Main Menu that will be recorded to this new timetable.
CMS displays an Entries Stored in the status line of the current window when the task is
run.
To run an historical report for the system:
a. Select Reports from the Main Menu.
b. Select Historical.
c. Select System.
d. Select System.
e. Select Daily.
CMS displays the report window.
13. Enter the required information in the Split(s)/Skill(s) and Date fields.
The Date field can accept relative dates; for example, 0 represents today and -1
represents yesterday.
14. Press the Enter key to access the action list, select the menu item that performs the
necessary action, and then press the Enter key again.
CMS displays a confirmation window.
It is possible to create more than one timetable task from a window. For example, suppose
you want historical split/skill summary interval reports for skills 1 through 9, and you also
want the same date and times for each report. To create this report, perform the following
steps:
a. Go to the report window and enter the following data:
b. Select Run on the action list. This creates a timetable task for skill 1.
c. Returning to the report input window, enter 2 for the skill number and select Run on
the action list. This creates a timetable task for skill 2. Repeat the same process for
skills 3 through 9.
584
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
15. Exit the window for the task and return to the Main Menu.
16. To add more tasks to the timetable, return to Step 12. Otherwise, open the Keep SLK
menu and then select the Stop option.
CMS displays a confirmation window asking if the timetable should be saved.
17. When CMS displays the confirmation window, press the Y key for Yes and then the Enter
key to save the task.
Note:
Note:
To exit the timetable at any time without saving your changes, select Stop from
the Keep SLK menu and then enter n in the confirmation window.
18. Select the Exit SLK to close the Timetable window.
Steps
To add tasks to a timetable:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Timetable and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable window.
Administration
July 2007
585
3. Press Ctrl + Z.
The fields in the window are cleared of all default information.
4. In the Timetable name field, enter the name of the timetable to which you want to add a
task.
5. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
6. In the action list, use the arrow keys to select Get contents and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: Get Contents window.
7. In the Task(s): field, enter the number of the task that you want to precede the task being
added.
If the task being added should appear as the fifth task, enter 4 in the Task(s): field.
To add a task to the beginning of the timetable, leave the Task(s): field blank. The new
task is added before the first task.
To add tasks to a timetable with no tasks, leave the Task(s): field blank.
8. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
9. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Add tasks item and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Main Menu and is waiting for you to perform an action that it can add as
a task. The status line of the Main Menu displays Keeping Entries.
10. Perform the task that you wish to have added to timetable. For more information on the
steps necessary in adding a task to a timetable, see Step 12 in Creating and scheduling a
timetable on page 581.
When the task is performed, CMS displays Entries Stored in the status line.
11. Exit the task window.
CMS displays the Main Menu.
At this point, more tasks can be added simply by performing them. These tasks will be
added to the timetable in order following the previous task.
12. If you finished adding tasks to the timetable, open the Keep SLK menu and then select the
Stop option.
CMS displays a confirmation window asking if the timetable should be saved.
586
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
13. Press the Y key for Yes and then the Enter key.
CMS saves the timetable with the newly added tasks and displays the Timetable: Get
Contents window.
Steps
To list all timetables:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. On the Keep SLK menu, select Timetable.
CMS displays the Timetable window.
3. Press Ctrl + Z.
CMS clears the default information from all fields in the Timetable window.
4. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
5. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the List all menu item and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: List All window listing all timetables.
Use the right- and left-arrow keys to scroll to the other fields in this window.
The following list describes the entries that can appear in the Status field.
Finished - This message indicates that the timetable was scheduled to run once and it
completed successfully.
Failed - This message indicates that the timetable failed to run successfully for the last
scheduled run time.
Administration
July 2007
587
Unscheduled - This message indicates that the timetable does not have a start time
or start date.
Copying a timetable
This topic provides the procedure for copying an existing timetable to a new timetable. Although
you can copy timetables from other users, you cannot copy over an existing timetable. When
you copy a timetable, the scheduling information and tasks in the timetable are copied. The
name of the timetable that will be copied should be known before starting this procedure.
Steps
To copy a timetable:
1. Select Timetable on the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK) menu.
CMS displays the Timetable window.
2. In the Timetable name: field, enter the name that will be used for the new timetable.
The following list provides the types of characters that can be entered in this field:
588
Underscore (_)
Blank ( )
Comma (,)
Period (.)
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
6. In the Copy from: field, enter the name of the timetable to copy.
7. In the User ID field, enter the user ID that is currently associated with the existing
timetable.
8. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list of the Timetable: Copy window.
9. Press the Enter key again.
CMS displays Successful in the status bar.
If this new timetable is not scheduled to run, CMS displays a message notifying you that
this copy needs to be rescheduled.
10. Select the Exit SLK to close the Timetable window.
Only the owner of the timetable or an administrator can copy timetable tasks.
You cannot copy a task more than once using the Copy command in the Get Contents
window. You must reuse the Copy command to make additional copies of a task.
You cannot copy more than 100 tasks into a timetable. If you exceed the limit, none of the
tasks are copied. The status line will display a Failed message when this occurs.
Copies of tasks can be placed after a specified task in the timetable, or each copy can be
placed directly after the task from which it was copied. The default is to place the copies
after the last task in the timetable.
Administration
July 2007
589
Steps
To copy a timetable task:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Timetable and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable window.
3. Press Ctrl + Z.
The fields in the window are cleared of all default information.
4. In the Timetable name: field, enter the name of the timetable containing the task to copy.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the user ID that created the timetable.
If you are not the owner or an administrator, you will not be able to copy tasks in the
timetable.
6. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Get contents menu item and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: Get Contents window.
8. In the Task(s): field, enter the task number to copy and press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list of the Timetable: Get Contents window.
590
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
9. Using the arrow keys, highlight the Copy menu item, and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: Get Contents: Copy window.
Add following task - The copied task will be placed immediately after the task
specified in this field.
Add each task after the task from which it was copied - The copied task is placed
immediately after itself.
The default action is to place the copied task at the end of the list.
11. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
12. Press the Enter key again.
CMS displays Working in the status line. When the operation completes, the status line
displays Successful. CMS closes the Copy window and displays the Get Contents
window.
If the operation fails, a message window appears stating the reason for the failure.
13. To close the Get Contents window, select the Exit SLK.
The Current and Main Menu Screen-Labeled Keys (SLKs) are blocked while modifying
tasks.
If you press the Exit SLK without selecting a task action, a popup window is displayed
stating that the task modification has been cancelled.
To exit the timetable without saving any changes, select the Stop item from the Keep SLK
menu.
Administration
July 2007
591
Steps
To change a timetable task:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Timetable and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable window.
3. Press Ctrl + Z.
The fields in the window are cleared of all default information.
4. In the Timetable name: field, enter the name of the timetable containing the task to
modify.
5. In the User ID: field, enter the user ID that created the timetable.
If you are not the owner or an administrator, you will not be able to modify tasks in the
timetable.
6. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
7. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Get contents menu item and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: Get Contents window.
592
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
8. In the Task(s): field, enter the number of the task to modify and press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list of the Get Contents window.
9. Using the arrow keys, highlight the Modify menu item and press the Enter key.
CMS displays a window for the specified task.
Example:
Run only on this CMS server - The timetable will run only on this CMS server. If this
timetable is backed up and migrated to another CMS server, it will not run.
Run on this or another CMS server - The timetable is capable of running on this or any
other CMS server. If this timetable is backed up and migrated to another CMS server, it will
function normally.
Only the owner of the timetable or an administrator can globally edit a timetable.
Administration
July 2007
593
If an error is made during a global edit, CMS displays an error message describing the
nature of the problem. All errors must be corrected before CMS allows you to complete the
modifications.
Steps
To edit a timetable globally:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Timetable and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable window.
3. Press Ctrl + Z.
The fields in the window are cleared of all default information.
4. In the Timetable name: field, enter the name of the timetable containing the tasks to
modify globally.
5. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
6. Using the arrow keys, highlight Find one and press the Enter key.
CMS locates the timetable and populates the remaining fields with the information from the
timetable.
7. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
594
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
8. Using the arrow keys, highlight Global edit and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: Global Edit window.
Run timetables only on this CMS server - All timetables owned by the specified user
ID will be modified so that they can only run on this CMS server. Timetables migrated
to another server will not function.
Run timetables on this or another CMS server - All timetables owned by the
specified user ID will be modified so that they can run on the current CMS server or, if
migrated, a different CMS server.
Only the owner of the timetable or an administrator can globally edit a timetable.
Administration
July 2007
595
If an error is made during a global edit, CMS displays an error message describing the
nature of the problem. All errors must be corrected before CMS allows you to complete the
modifications.
Steps
To edit multiple tasks within a timetable:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Timetable and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable window.
3. Press Ctrl + Z.
The fields in the window are cleared of all default information.
4. In the Timetable name: field, enter the name of the timetable containing the tasks to
modify globally.
5. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
6. Using the arrow keys, highlight Find one and press the Enter key.
CMS locates the timetable and populates the remaining fields with the information from the
timetable.
7. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
596
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
8. Using the arrow keys, highlight Get contents and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: Get Contents window.
9. In the Task(s): field, enter the tasks to modify using the following methods:
10. After the tasks to globally edit have been specified, press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
11. Using the arrow keys, highlight Global edit and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: Get contents: Global edit window.
12. Place an x in the field that will be changed for all specified tasks.
13. In the field to the right of the selected option, enter one or more values as necessary.
To have multiple reports retrieve contact center data that occurred at 2:00 PM, place an x
in the Times option and enter 2:00 PM or 14:00 in the associated field to the right.
For the Date/Dates option, enter dates in either MM/DD/YY format or the relative format
based on today (0 for today, -1 for yesterday). You can separate individual data entry
items with semicolons (;) and value ranges with hyphens (-) between entries.
14. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
Administration
July 2007
597
15. Using the arrow keys, highlight Confirm and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: Get Contents: Global Edit: Confirm window.
This window is used to confirm the tasks that will be modified. No changes have been
made at this point. If some specified tasks do not appear in the confirmation window, it is
because those tasks do not use the data specified when they are run. For example, some
reports only use a date value to retrieve information; therefore, changing the time value will
not modify this task. If the tasks listed in this window are not correct, you can go back to
the previous windows and make adjustments as necessary.
16. Select the Exit SLK.
CMS closes the Timetable: Get Contents: Global Edit: Confirm window.
17. If you are satisfied with the changes, press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
18. Using the arrow keys, highlight Modify and press the Enter key.
CMS modifies the tasks in this timetable with the data values specified, closes the
Timetable: Get Contents: Global Edit window, and displays Successful in the status line
when the operation is complete.
19. Close the Timetable: Get Contents by selecting the Exit SLK.
598
Only the owner of the timetable or an administrator can delete tasks from a timetable.
To exit the timetable without saving any changes, select the Stop item from the Keep SLK
menu.
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
Steps
To delete a task from a timetable:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Timetable and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable window.
3. Press Ctrl + Z.
The fields in the window are cleared of all default information.
4. In the Timetable name: field, enter the name of the timetable containing the tasks to
modify globally.
5. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
6. Using the arrow keys, highlight Find one and press the Enter key.
CMS locates the timetable and populates the remaining fields with the information from the
timetable.
7. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
Administration
July 2007
599
8. Using the arrow keys, highlight Get contents and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Timetable: Get Contents window.
Deleting a timetable
This topic provides the procedure for deleting a timetable.
Steps
To delete a timetable:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
600
Administration
July 2007
Timetables
3. Press Ctrl + Z.
The fields in the window are cleared of all default information.
4. In the Timetable name: field, enter the name of the timetable containing the tasks to
modify globally.
5. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
6. Using the arrow keys, highlight Find one and press the Enter key.
CMS locates the timetable and populates the remaining fields with the information from the
timetable.
7. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
8. Using the arrow keys, highlight Delete and press the Enter key.
CMS displays a confirmation window.
9. Press the Y key for Yes and then the Enter key.
CMS deletes the timetable and a successful message is displayed in the status line.
Administration
July 2007
601
Shortcuts
A shortcut is similar to a timetable except that it is not run based on time but rather when it is
executed by a user. A shortcut is a fast and easy way for an ASCII terminal user to select
windows that are used often. For example, you can create a shortcut for two different real-time
reports that you normally view throughout the day. The shortcut displays these reports, fills out
the input windows, and places them on the terminal screen so that they can both be viewed at
once. Although useful for other tasks, shortcuts are most commonly used to run real-time
reports.
This section contains the following topics:
602
You cannot exceed your maximum allowable window count by using a shortcut.
When using the Keep mode to record the tasks for a shortcut, the Current
Screen-Labeled Key (SLK) will only shift focus between windows in the shortcut window. It
will not shift focus to windows that were open before you entered Keep mode.
Administration
July 2007
Shortcuts
When you create a shortcut, tasks that have errors in them are saved, but they will not
execute when the shortcut is run. The task containing the error will display an error
message which causes the shortcut to stop. The error must be corrected before the
shortcut can run properly. To delete the error, exit the shortcut without saving changes or
edit the shortcut if the error has already been saved.
Deleting a CMS user who owns shortcuts results in those shortcuts also being deleted.
Permissions
Depending on the procedure that you want to perform, you need the following permissions:
You must have read and write permissions for any CMS subsystems and ACD entities
associated with the tasks included in a shortcut.
Users without the Administrator permission can view and copy the shortcuts of other
users, but they cannot add, modify, or delete those shortcuts.
If the access permissions for a user are changed, it could cause the shortcuts of that user
to not run properly. For example, removing skill permissions for a user can result in a
shortcut report not running or displaying data for that skill.
Creating a shortcut
This topic provides the procedure for creating a shortcut and adding tasks for it to perform.
Steps
To create a shortcut:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
Administration
July 2007
603
The User ID: field shows the ID of the user who ran this command. Unless you have
Administrator permissions, you will not be able to create a shortcut for another user.
3. In the Shortcut name: field, enter a unique name for this shortcut.
Keep the name for the shortcut simple as it becomes the name that must be entered when
you wish to execute it from the CMS Main Menu.
4. In the Description: field, enter a brief description for the shortcut.
This field is optional.
5. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
6. Highlight the Add item and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Main Menu. CMS is now in Keep mode.
7. Use the Main Menu to select tasks. Multiple windows can be shown on the screen at one
time.
8. Use the Move and Size items from the Window SLK menu to adjust the placement and
dimensions of each window.
9. When satisfied with the report windows, input windows, and their placement and sizes on
the screen, select the Stop item from the Keep SLK menu.
CMS displays a confirmation window asking if the shortcut should be saved.
10. Press the Y key for Yes and then Enter to save the shortcut.
CMS displays the Shortcut window again and the status line displays a Successful
message indicated that the shortcut was saved.
11. Select the Exit SLK to close the Shortcut window and return to the Main Menu.
604
Administration
July 2007
Shortcuts
Steps
To add tasks to a shortcut:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Shortcut and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut window.
3. In the Shortcut name: field, enter the name of the shortcut which will have new tasks
added.
4. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
5. Highlight Get contents and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut: Get Contents window.
6. In the Task(s): field, enter the number of the task that the new task will follow.
To add a task in the second position of the shortcut, enter 1 in the Task(s): field.
If you wish the new task to be in the first position, leave the Task(s): field blank.
Administration
July 2007
605
Running a shortcut
This topic provides the procedure for executing a shortcut.
Steps
To run a shortcut:
1. At the CMS Main Menu, press the ; (semicolon) key.
CMS selects the command line of the Main Menu.
606
Administration
July 2007
Shortcuts
2. Enter the name of the shortcut to run and press the Enter key.
The shortcut starts running and locks the keyboard until the shortcut finishes. When the
shortcut finishes, the status line displays a Successful message.
Steps
To edit a shortcut:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Shortcut and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut window.
3. In the Shortcut name: field, enter the name of the shortcut to modify.
4. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
5. Highlight Find one and press the Enter key.
CMS retrieves the shortcut and populates the Description: and User ID: fields with
information from the shortcut.
6. Make the necessary change to the Description: field.
7. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
8. Highlight Modify and press the Enter key.
CMS saves the changes to the shortcut displays a Successful message in the status line.
9. Select the Exit SLK to close the Shortcut window.
Administration
July 2007
607
Copying a shortcut
This topic provides the procedure for copying an existing shortcut into a new shortcut. All users
can copy shortcuts owned by other users. However, no shortcuts owned by your user ID, even
as an Administrator, can be copied by you to another user. It is not possible to copy a shortcut
over an existing shortcut.
Steps
To copy a shortcut:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Shortcut and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut window.
3. In the Shortcut name: field, enter the name of the new shortcut that will be created.
4. In the Description: field, enter a brief phrase identifying the new shortcut.
This field is optional.
5. In the User ID: field, ensure your user ID is present.
6. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
7. Highlight Copy and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut: Copy window.
8. In the Copy from: field, enter the name of the shortcut to copy as the new shortcut.
9. In the User ID: field, enter the ID of the user that owns the shortcut to copy.
608
Administration
July 2007
Shortcuts
Steps
To copy a shortcut task:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Shortcut and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut window.
3. In the Shortcut name: field, enter the name of the shortcut in which a task will be copied.
4. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
Administration
July 2007
609
6. In the Task(s): field, enter the number of the task to copy and press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
7. Highlight Copy and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut: Get Contents: Copy window.
Add following task - This option will create the task after the task number specified in
the field to the right.
Add each task after the task from which it was copied - This option will create the
task and place it immediately following the original task. If you specified to make a
copy of task #1, the copy will be created as task #2. Any other tasks are shifted to a
higher number to accommodate this action.
610
Administration
July 2007
Shortcuts
Steps
To modify a shortcut task:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Shortcut and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut window.
3. In the Shortcut name: field, enter the name of the shortcut where tasks will be modified.
4. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
5. Highlight Get contents and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut: Get Contents window.
6. In the Task(s): field, enter the number of the task to modify and press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
7. Highlight Modify and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the input window of the specified task.
Administration
July 2007
611
8. Change the input parameters of the window as necessary. For example, this might include
changing the split, agent, or another entity on which a report is based. This can also
include making changes to the size and position of the task window.
9. When the appropriate information has been entered, press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
10. Highlight Modify and press the Enter key.
CMS displays a confirmation asking if the changes should be saved.
11. Press the Y key for Yes and then the Enter key.
CMS saves the changes to the task, closes the task window, and displays a Successful
message in the status line.
12. Select the Exit SLK to close the Shortcut: Get Contents window.
Steps
To delete a shortcut task:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
2. Select Shortcut and press the Enter key.
CMS displays the Shortcut window.
3. In the Shortcut name: field, enter the name of the shortcut containing the task to delete.
4. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
612
Administration
July 2007
Shortcuts
Deleting a shortcut
This topic provides the procedure for deleting a shortcut from the CMS server.
Steps
To delete a shortcut:
1. From the CMS Main Menu, select the Keep Screen-Labeled Key (SLK).
Administration
July 2007
613
3. In the Shortcut name: field, enter the name of the shortcut to delete.
Shortcuts owned by other users cannot be deleted.
4. Press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
5. Highlight Find one and press the Enter key.
CMS retrieves the information for the specified shortcut. If the shortcut with the name
specified cannot be found, this will be indicated on the status line.
6. Verify that this is the shortcut to be deleted and press the Enter key.
CMS shifts focus to the action list.
7. Highlight Delete and press the Enter key.
CMS displays a confirmation window.
8. Press the Y key for Yes and then the Enter key.
CMS deletes the specified shortcut and displays a Successful message in the status line.
614
Administration
July 2007
Glossary
abandoned call
abandoned call
search
An ACD capability that enables the system to verify that the caller is still on the
line before passing the call to an agent.
acceptable service
level
1) A target value for the acceptable amount of time before an agent answers a
call.
2) A percentage of calls answered within a set amount of time (for example,
80% of calls answered within 20 seconds).
access permissions
Permissions assigned to a CMS user so that the user can access different CMS
capabilities or administer specific elements such as splits/skills, trunks, or
vectors. Access permissions can be read, write, or exceptions. See also read
permission, write permission.
ACD
ACD call
Action List
A menu in the upper right-hand corner of most CMS ASCII screens. The menu
lists the actions available for that particular window.
ACW
Adjunct/Switch
Applications
Interface (ASAI)
An agent state consisting of work related to the preceding ACD call. If an agent
hangs up after an ACD call, the agent is in ACW. ACW is also accessible by a
button on the agents set and does not have to be related to an ACD call.
agent
A person or VRU port that answers calls to an ACD split/skill. The agent is
represented to CMS by a login identification keyed into a voice terminal.
agent login ID
agent occupancy
The percentage of time that you expect or target for each split/skill agent to
spend on ACD calls and in ACD while logged in.
Administration
July 2007
615
The combination of the agent login ID and the skills the agent is assigned. Data
is collected for the agent by skill so that the total work for the agent is the sum of
all skills in which the agent worked.
agent position
(non-EAS)
The combination of the agent login ID and the split the agent logged into.
Agents logged into multiple splits are associated with multiple positions. Call
data is collected separately for each agent/split combination.
agent role
A description of the kind of service an agent in multiple skills give for one of
these skills. Agent role is a combination of call-handling preference and skill/
reserve levels.
agent skill
An attribute that is associated with an ACD agent and that qualifies the agent to
handle calls requiring the attribute. An agent can be assigned up to 60 skills; for
example, the ability to speak a particular language or the expertise to handle a
certain product.
See also primary skill, secondary skill, and skill level
agent state
A feature of agent call handling that allows agents to change their availability to
the switch; for example, ACW, AVAIL, AUX.
agent terminal
agent trace
A CMS capability that allows you to trace agent activities such as state changes
which can then be shown in a report.
AI
ANI
announcement
A recorded voice message that typically identifies the calls destination, asks
the caller to stay on the line, and describes the product or service offered. With
the Call Vectoring feature, announcements can be part of a vectors call
processing.
ASA
ASAI
auto-available split
Auto-in (AI)
An ACD work mode that makes the agent available to receive calls and allows
the agent to receive a new ACD call immediately after disconnecting from the
previous call.
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
1) A switch feature that channels high-volume incoming and outgoing call traffic
to agent groups (splits or skills).
2) An agent state in which the extension is engaged on an ACD call.
Automatic Number
Identification (ANI)
An industry term for notification of the calling party number (CPN). When the
calling party is connected through a switch, the CPN can be either a billing
number for the switch or the station identification (SID) number.
AUX
616
Administration
July 2007
Call Prompting
Codes that enable a contact center to track an agents time more precisely
when the agent is in the AUX state. Agents can specify why they are in the AUX
state - for example, on break or in a meeting.
AVAIL
available (AVAIL)
An agent work mode in which the extension can accept an ACD call. The agent
enters this state by selecting the AI (auto-in) or MI (manual-in) work mode.
average agent
service time
The average time you are expecting or targeting each agent to spend on an
ACD call including talk time and ACW time.
Avaya Business
Advocate
Avaya Interactive
Response
Average Speed of
Answer (ASA)
The average time a caller waits in queue before connecting to an agent. The
ASA for a split/skill includes the time spent in queue and the time ringing an
agent. The ASA for a VDN includes the time spent in vector processing
including the time spent in queue and the time ringing for the VDN that the call
was answered in.
backup
The process of protecting data by writing the contents of the disk to an archive,
such as tape, that can be removed from the computer environment and stored
safely.
calculation
call-based items
The category of database items in CMS that are entered in the database after a
call completes. If a call starts and ends in different intrahour intervals, the
call-based data is recorded for the interval in which the call completed. Most
database items are call-based.
call-handling
performance
call-handling profile
Call Prompting
Administration
July 2007
617
Call Vectoring
Call Vectoring
A switch feature that provides a highly flexible method for processing ACD calls
using VDNs and vectors as processing points between trunk groups and splits.
Call Vectoring permits a treatment of calls that is independent of splits.
An ACD capability that allows the agent to enter a string of digits during or after
the call and send them to CMS for management reporting.
calls carried
A CMS capability that allows you to change a single agents skill assignment or
apply an agent template to multiple agents.
Call Management
System (CMS)
A software product used to connect to a switch that monitors and records data
for large volumes of telephone calls that are processed through the ACD
feature of the switch.
CMSADM backup
A backup that saves all the file systems on the CMS server including the Solaris
operating system, CMS programs, CMS data, and non-CMS data.
CONN
connected (CONN)
A trunk state in which a caller and an agent are connected on an ACD call.
connected call
A non-ACD call connected to an agent through a VDN and for which CMS
receives an indication that the call rang or was answered.
CONVERSANT
current
current interval
The current intrahour period of time (15, 30, or 60 minutes) which is archived to
the historical database when the period expires. The current interval is part of
the real-time database.
The time a call has waited for service in a call queue adjusted for queue priority.
custom report
A real-time or historical report that has been customized from standard reports
or created by the user through the Custom Reports subsystem of CMS.
CWC
DABN
DACD
DACW
daily data
data collection
This CMS feature can be used to determine if call activity and the associated
ACD data is recorded. In many maintenance operations, it is necessary to
disable data collection. If data collection is turned off, CMS does not void data
on current call activity.
database
The CMS databases are used to store ACD data according to a specific time
period. This can be current and previous intrahour real-time data or intrahour,
daily, weekly, and monthly historical data.
618
Administration
July 2007
EWT
database item
A name for a specific type of data stored in one of the CMS databases. A
database item can store ACD identifiers such as split numbers or names, login
IDs, and VDNs or statistical data on ACD performance such as number of ACD
calls, wait time for calls in queue, current states of individual agents, and so
forth.
database tables
Each CMS database can consist of several database tables which are used to
logically separate data based on different criteria. For example, historical
reports can be used to display data on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis; each of
these different time measurements are stored in separate database tables.
DDC
dequeued and
abandoned (DABN)
A trunk state in which the trunk quickly goes idle after the caller abandons the
call.
designer reports
Customized reports that you create and run through Avaya CMS Supervisor
Report Designer. See the Avaya CMS Supervisor Report Designer User Guide
for more information.
Dictionary
DID
Digital Subscriber
Line (DSL)
A public switched telephone network (PSTN) line that provides high bandwidth
for short distances using copper cable. This type of line operates at the Basic
Rate Interface (BRI) with two 64-kilobit per second circuit-switched channels
and one 16-kilobit packet-switched channel. DSL can carry both data and voice
signals at the same time.
An agent state in which the agent is in the after call work (ACW) state for a
direct agent ACD call.
An EAS capability that allows a caller to reach the same agent every time and
allows the contact center to include the call as an ACD call in management
tracking. This is ideal for claims processing in which a client needs to speak
with the agent handling the claim. It also ensures a high level of customer
service without reducing management control.
direct department
calling (DDC)
A non-EAS option to select an agent when more than one agent is available.
The call goes to the agent closest to the top of an ordered list.
The use of an incoming trunk used for dialing directly from the public network
into a communications system without help from the attendant.
DSL
EAS
entity
A generic term for an agent, split/skill, trunk, trunk group, VDN, or vector.
EWT
Administration
July 2007
619
exception
exception
Activity in an ACD which falls outside the limits you have defined and usually
indicates abnormal or unacceptable performance of the ACD, agents, splits/
skills, VDNs, vectors, trunks, or trunk groups. The parameters used to
determine the occurrence of an exception are defined in the Exceptions
subsystem of CMS.
exception
permissions
The rights that a user has in being notified or viewing the instances where calls,
contact center entities, or subsystems operated above or below specified
thresholds.
Expert Agent
Selection (EAS)
extension call
FBUSY
FDISC
flex agents
Agents who have the role of roving, backup, or allocated. Top and reserve
agents are not flex agents. See the Avaya Business Advocate User Guide for
more information.
flexible routing
An ACD capability that allows you to choose how incoming calls should be
routed to agents in a split. Calls can be routed to the first available agent or to
the most-idle agent.
forced busy
(FBUSY)
forced disconnect
(FDISC)
Forecast, Avaya
CMS
An Avaya product used to generate reports displaying expected call traffic and
agent/trunk group requirements for the contact center for a particular day or
period in the future.
historical database
620
Administration
July 2007
LOGON
historical reports
Reports of past ACD data for various agent, split/skill, trunk, trunk group, VDN,
or vector activities. Historical reports summarize call data into daily, weekly, or
monthly totals.
HOLD
A trunk state in which an agent has put a call on this trunk on hold.
IDLE
A trunk state in which this trunk is not in use and is waiting for a call.
II
Inbound Call
Management (ICM)
A set of switch and adjunct features using ASAI to enable the adjunct to provide
automatic screen delivery and call routing.
Information
Indicator (II)
A 2-digit code that identifies the type of originating line for incoming ISDN PRI
calls, such as hotel or pay phone.
INFORMIX
INFORMIX SQL
Integrated Services
Digital Network
(ISDN)
A digital standard for telephony that enables analog and digital signals on the
same line.
interval ASA
interval-based items
intrahour interval
ISDN
LAN
Logical Agent
LOGOFF
An agent trace work mode in which an agent is logged out and not available to
take ACD calls.
LOGON
An agent trace work mode in which an agent is logged in and available to take
ACD calls.
Administration
July 2007
621
Codes that enable an agent to specify the reason for logging out such as the
end of a shift or for training.
Look Ahead
Interflow (LAI)
A switch feature that can be used to balance the call load among multiple
contact centers. LAI works with Call Vectoring and ISDN PRI trunks to
intelligently route calls between contact centers. This allows multiple contact
centers to share workloads, expand hours of coverage, and allows calls o be
transparently handled by contact centers in different time zones.
maintenance
maintenance busy
(MBUSY)
A trunk state in which the trunk is out of service for maintenance purposes.
Manual-In (MI)
An ACD work mode in which an agent is available to receive an ACD call and is
automatically placed into the ACW state upon release from the call.
MBUSY
MCH
measured
A term meaning that an ACD element such as agent, split/skill, trunk, trunk
group, VDN, or vector that is identified to CMS for data collection. If the ACD
element is not measured, no data is collected.
MI
MIA
monthly data
Multiple Call
Handling (MCH)
A process in which an agent receives an ACD call while other calls are active
on the agents station. The agent must put the current call on hold and press
Auto-In/Manual-In to receive another ACD call.
multiple split
queuing
A Call Vectoring capability that directs a call to up to three splits at the same
time, with the first agent who is free receiving the call.
multi-user mode
A CMS state in which any administered user can log into CMS and data
continues to be collected if the data collection feature is enabled.
name (synonym)
fields
A field in which you can input a name (synonym) that you have entered in the
Dictionary. For example, you can input names of agents, splits/skills, agent
groups, trunk groups, VDNs, or vectors.
night service
A switch capability that enables calls that arrive after business hours or on
weekends to be automatically re-routed to a split, an announcement, or an
alternate destination set up for after-hours coverage.
622
Administration
July 2007
reserve agent
nonprimary split/
skill
The second and third splits/skills to which a call queued to multiple splits/skills
queues in a VDN. Also called secondary and tertiary split/skill, respectively.
OTHER
An agent work mode in which the agent is on a direct agent call, on a call for
another split or skill, or has put a call on hold and has not chosen another work
mode.
Outbound Call
Management (OCM)
A set of switch and adjunct features using ASAI that distributes outbound calls
initiated by an adjunct to internal extensions (usually ACD agents).
phantom abandon
call timer
A CMS capability that tracks information about abandoned calls. When the
phantom abandon call timer is enabled, calls with a duration shorter than the
administered value (0 to 10 seconds) are counted as phantom abandon calls.
Setting the timer to 0 disables this capability.
percent within
service level
previous interval
An intrahour interval that is part of the real-time database. At the end of each
intrahour interval, the contents of the current intrahour interval are copied to the
previous intrahour interval portion of the real-time database.
primary skill
A skill assigned to an agent as that agents strongest skill. Primary skills are the
areas in which the agent has the most expertise.
pseudo-ACD
queue
A holding area for calls waiting to be answered in the order in which they were
received. Calls in a queue may have different priority levels, in which case, calls
with a higher priority are answered first.
QUEUED
A trunk state in which an ACD call has seized the trunk and is queued to a split/
skill, waiting for an agent to answer.
read permission
A permission with which a CMS user can access and view data; for example,
running reports or viewing the Dictionary subsystem.
real-time database
real-time reports
A report that shows ACD call activity on agents, split/skills, trunks, trunk groups,
VDNs, and vectors for the current or previous intrahour interval.
Redirect On No
Answer
An ACD capability that assist the user if a call is not answered in a specified
number of rings. The terminal extension, including ports with VRUs, is busied
out and the call goes back into the queue at top priority.
refresh rate
The number of seconds that CMS should wait for each update of real-time
report data.
reserve agent
An agent whose skills are set so that they do not have a top skill, but are used
to handle calls when all other agents of that skill are unavailable. Reserve
agents are used for high-priority skills where customers must not wait for long
periods of time.
Administration
July 2007
623
RINGING
RINGING
1) An agent state consisting of the time a call rings at an agents voice terminal
after leaving the queue and before the agent answers the call.
2) A trunk state in which a call is ringing at the agents voice terminal.
rolling ASA
scripting
secondary skill
A skill assigned to an agent in a subject that is not that agents strongest area of
expertise. Secondary skills are used in Communication Manager systems with
Expert Agent Selection (EAS).
SEIZED
service level
A time, in seconds, within which all calls should be answered. Also called
acceptable service level.
A feature that allows a user to dial into the switch and monitor a call.
A feature available with Communication Manager systems that give a user the
ability to monitor the treatment that a call receives as it is processed by a VDN.
shortcut
A series of tasks which, when run, are performed on the CMS server. Shortcuts
are a fast, easy way to view windows every day for the same ACD entities.
single-user mode
A CMS mode in which only one administrator can log in to the CMS server.
Data continues to be collected if the data collection feature is enabled.
skill
skill level
screen-labeled key
(SLK)
The first eight function keys at the top of the keyboard that correspond to the
screen labels at the bottom of the CMS ASCII terminal screen. The screen
labels indicate each keys function.
split
staffed agent
standard reports
The set of reports that are supplied with CMS or CMS Supervisor.
station
1) An unmeasured extension
2) An extension that is not currently staffed by an agent or that is a member of
an unmeasured split/skill.
switch
timetable
A CMS feature that allows you to schedule one or more activities to run
unattended. Timetables can be set to run once or at multiple times.
624
Administration
July 2007
weekly data
trunk
A telephone circuit that carries calls between two switches, between a central
office and a switch, or between a central office and a telephone.
trunk group
A group of trunks that are assigned the same dialing digits: either a phone
number or a direct inward dialed (DID) prefix.
uniform call
distribution (UCD)
A method of call distribution in which the most idle agent for a skill receives the
call (if the agent is available).
universal call
identifier (UCID)
UNKNOWN
1) An agent state in which CMS does not recognize the state of the agent.
2) A trunk state in which CMS does not recognize the state of the trunk.
UNSTAF
An agent state in which the agent is not logged in and, therefore, is not tracked
by CMS.
VDN
VDN calls-counted
VDN or Origin
Announcement
(VOA)
A prioritized list of agent skills administered for a VDN that are needed or
preferred for the answering agent. VDN skill preferences require a call to be
routed to an ACD agent with a particular attribute or set of attributes.
vector
A list of steps that process calls according to a user definition. The steps in a
vector can send calls to splits, play announcements and music, disconnect
calls, give calls a busy signal, or route calls to other destinations based on
specific criteria.
vector command
Vector Directory
Number (VDN)
vector step
A single task within a vector that performs an action regarding a call. A vector
step consists of a command with the possibility of one or more conditions or
parameters, if necessary.
vector step
condition
VOA
voice terminal
weekly data
Administration
July 2007
625
write permission
write permission
626
Administration
A permission with which a CMS user can add, modify, or delete data and
execute processes.
July 2007
Index
Index
A
ACD
Administration Log . . . . . . . . .
administrative interface . . . . . . .
listing connection status . . . . . . .
listing status . . . . . . . . . . . .
name, deleting . . . . . . . . . . .
settings, listing all . . . . . . . . . .
settings, viewing . . . . . . . . . .
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
translations, requesting . . . . . . .
user permissions . . . . . . . . . .
user permissions, adding . . . . . .
user permissions, deleting . . . . . .
user permissions, listing all . . . . .
user permissions, modifying . . . . .
user permissions, viewing . . . . . .
viewing archiving status of all . . . .
viewing archiving status of one . . .
viewing connection status . . . . . .
viewing status . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding an ACD . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Center Administration . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting an ACD . . . . . . . . . .
Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . .
view contents . . . . . . . . . .
List all
Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . .
listing all
Call Center Admin . . . . . . . .
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . .
renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
view contents . . . . . . . . . . . .
viewing contents . . . . . . . . . .
ACD status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
adding agents to an existing agent group
adding an ACD name . . . . . . . . .
adding an agent group . . . . . . . . .
adding an AUX reason code name . . .
administering printers . . . . . . . . .
agent
copying agent groups . . . . . . . .
exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 566
. 27
. 529
. 492
. 60
. 484
. 483
. 482
. 495
. 367
. 368
. 374
. 371
. 372
. 369
. 498
. 496
. 528
. 489
54, 227
. . 230
. . 233
. . 227
. . 240
. . 236
. . 54
. . 56
. . . . . . 55
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 231
. 238
. 238
. 56
. 234
. 488
. 57
. 67
. 58
. 63
. 83
. 532
. . . . . . 66
. . . . . . 289
July 2007
627
Index
viewing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
B
backup
CMSADM . . . . .
maintenance . . . .
recovery kit . . . . .
backup information
how to interpret . . .
backup volume
labeling . . . . . .
backup/restore devices
adding . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . .
modifying . . . . .
viewing. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 504
. 507
. 503
. 506
. 501
calculations . . . . . . .
adding . . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . . .
modifying . . . . . .
viewing. . . . . . . .
call center
configuration . . . . .
Call Center Administration
ACD Groups . . . . .
Call Vectoring . . . . . .
capabilities of . . . . .
call work code 0 . . . . .
call work code names
adding . . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . . .
modifying . . . . . .
viewing. . . . . . . .
call work codes . . . . .
adding . . . . . . . .
configuring . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . . .
unassigned . . . . . .
viewing. . . . . . . .
CentreVu CMS ACD
master, selecting . . .
CentreVu CMS data
migrating . . . . . . .
migrating, R3 . . . . .
CentreVu CMS state
changing . . . . . . .
chunks . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
628
Administration
89
93
95
92
94
91
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 227
. 201
. 27
. 241
. 98
. 102
. 100
. 101
. 99
96, 241
. . 242
. . 241
. . 246
. . 245
. . 241
. . 244
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
458
512
. 43
. 40
40, 46
. 527
. 103
. 104
. 108
. 106
. 107
. 105
. . 66
. 109
. . 110
. . 114
. . 112
. . 113
. . 111
D
data
historical, migrating . . . . . . . . . . .
storage, allocating . . . . . . . . . . . .
data collection
disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
state, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Storage Allocation . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Summarizing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data summarizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
settings, modifying. . . . . . . . . . . .
Database constants . . . . . . . . . . . .
database items
custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
custom, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
custom, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
custom, listing all . . . . . . . . . . . .
custom, modifying . . . . . . . . . . . .
custom, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dbspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD, modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dbspaces
contents, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting a custom calculation . . . . . . . .
deleting agents in an existing agent group . .
deleting an agent group . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting an announcement name or synonym
deleting an AUX reason code . . . . . . . .
description of the ACD Status window
. . . 461
. . . 437
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
434
434
346
434
539
437
446
472
479
103
109
. 110
. 114
. 112
. 113
. 111
148
. 31
458
456
38
95
69
70
81
88
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
Index
with EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
without EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
description of the Archiving Status - List All window
description of the Backup Data window . . . . . .
Description of the Connection Status Window . . .
devices
backup/restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dictionary
ACD Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
view contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD name, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
agent group members report, running . . . . .
announcement name, adding . . . . . . . . .
announcement name, viewing . . . . . . . . .
calculations, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
calculations, listing all . . . . . . . . . . . . .
calculations, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
call work code names, adding . . . . . . . . .
call work code names, deleting . . . . . . . .
call work code names, listing all . . . . . . . .
call work code names, modifying . . . . . . . .
call work code names, viewing . . . . . . . . .
call work codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
constant, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
constants, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
constants, listing all . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
constants, modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . .
constants, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
custom database item, viewing . . . . . . . .
custom database items . . . . . . . . . . . .
custom database items, adding . . . . . . . .
custom database items, deleting . . . . . . . .
custom database items, listing all . . . . . . .
custom database items, modifying . . . . . . .
location ID, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
location ID, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
location ID, listing all . . . . . . . . . . . . .
location ID, modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . .
location ID, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
location IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
login ID name, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
login ID name, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . .
login ID name, listing all . . . . . . . . . . . .
login ID name, modifying . . . . . . . . . . .
login ID name, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . .
login ID names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logout reason code name, adding . . . . . . .
logout reason code name, deleting . . . . . . .
logout reason code name, listing all . . . . . .
logout reason code name, modifying . . . . . .
logout reason code name, viewing . . . . . . .
logout reason code names . . . . . . . . . .
reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administration
. 493
. 494
. 499
. 517
. 531
. 500
. 54
. 55
. 56
. 60
. 176
. 77
. 78
. 93
. 92
. 91
. 98
. 102
. 100
. 101
. 99
. 96
. 108
. 103
. 104
. 106
. 107
. 105
. 111
. 109
. 110
. 114
. 112
. 113
. 118
. 122
. 120
. 121
. 119
. 117
. 124
. 128
. 126
. 127
. 125
. 123
. 130
. 135
. 132
. 134
. 131
. 129
. 173
reports, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill name, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill name, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill name, listing all . . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill name, modifying . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill name, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill string value, field descriptions . . . . .
split/skill string values . . . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill string values, modifying . . . . . . . .
split/skill string values, viewing . . . . . . . . .
standard CMS item, viewing . . . . . . . . . .
standard database item, viewing . . . . . . . .
standard database items . . . . . . . . . . . .
standard database items, viewing alphabetically .
trunk group name, adding . . . . . . . . . . .
trunk group name, deleting . . . . . . . . . . .
trunk group name, listing all . . . . . . . . . .
trunk group name, modifying . . . . . . . . . .
trunk group names . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trunk group names, listing all . . . . . . . . . .
trunk string value, viewing and modifying . . . .
trunk string values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trunk string values, field descriptions . . . . . .
VDN Name, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDN name, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDN name, listing all . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDN name, modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDN name, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDN names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vector name, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vector name, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vector name, listing all . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vector name, modifying . . . . . . . . . . . .
vector name, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vector names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dictionary rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disk space
allocating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
. 52
143
147
145
146
144
141
140
136
138
137
149
149
148
150
152
156
153
155
151
154
158
157
159
162
166
164
165
163
160
168
172
170
171
169
167
. 51
437
E
EAS (See Expert Agent Selection), Expert Agent Selection
201
EAS (see Expert Agent Selection), Expert Agent Selection
27
error log messages
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
exceptions
agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
agent, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
agent, definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
agent, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
agent, modifying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
July 2007
629
Index
agent, report . . . . . . . . .
data collection . . . . . . . .
definition . . . . . . . . . . .
malicious call trace report . . .
notification . . . . . . . . . .
notification, changing . . . . .
Real-time exceptions log . . .
split/skill . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill, adding . . . . . . .
split/skill, definitions . . . . . .
split/skill, deleting . . . . . . .
split/skill, modifying . . . . . .
split/skill, report . . . . . . . .
trunk group . . . . . . . . . .
trunk group, adding . . . . . .
trunk group, deleting . . . . .
trunk group, modifying . . . .
trunk group, report . . . . . .
VDN, adding . . . . . . . . .
VDN, deleting . . . . . . . .
VDN, modifying . . . . . . . .
VDN, report . . . . . . . . .
vector . . . . . . . . . . . .
vector, adding . . . . . . . .
vector, deleting . . . . . . . .
vector, modifying . . . . . . .
vector, report . . . . . . . . .
Expert Agent Selection (EAS)
agent trace . . . . . . . . . .
export
report output . . . . . . . . .
Export All Data window . . . . . .
Export Chart Data window . . . .
extensions
split assignments, changing . .
splits, moving between . . . .
External Application Status feature
disabling . . . . . . . . . . .
enabling . . . . . . . . . . .
external applications
starting or stopping . . . . . .
states, viewing . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 299
. 346
. 283
. 349
. 288
. 288
. 351
. 302
. 303
. 310
. 308
. 306
. 311
. 314
. 315
. 319
. 317
. 322
. 326
. 330
. 328
. 333
. 336
. 337
. 341
. 339
. 343
630
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
H
helplines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
historical data
archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
I
Informix Dynamic Server (IDS) . .
Informix Software, [Link]
interface to historical database .
input window
scripting . . . . . . . . . . .
interval
intrahour . . . . . . . . . . .
intrahour, changing . . . . . .
intervals
storage . . . . . . . . . . . .
storage, viewing . . . . . . . .
intrahour interval . . . . . . . . .
changing . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 452
. . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . 196
. . . . . . . . 472
. . . . . . . . 474
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
472
473
472
474
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 64
. 79
. 85
. 117
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
124
128
126
127
125
123
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
130
135
132
134
131
129
. . . . . . . . . 201
. . . . . . . . . 193
. . . . . . . . . 193
. . . . . . . . . 193
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 219
. 222
. 447
. 448
. 448
. . . . . . . . . 451
. . . . . . . . . 450
F
Feature Access
user permissions, listing all .
user permissions, modifying .
user permissions, viewing . .
First Day of Week . . . . . . .
Free Space Allocation . . . . .
contents, viewing . . . . . .
modifying . . . . . . . . .
viewing. . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 379
. 381
. 378
. 38
. 452
. 456
. 458
. 454
M
Main Menu
Addition Access, assigning/modifying . . . . . . 386
Addition Access, listing all . . . . . . . . . . . 385
July 2007
Index
Addition Access, viewing . . . .
maintenance backup . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Error Log
running. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Error Log messages. .
Maintenance tool . . . . . . . . .
malicious call trace
report . . . . . . . . . . . . .
master ACD
see ACD
migrating CentreVu CMS data. . .
modifying a custom calculation . . .
modifying an ACD name . . . . . .
modifying an announcement name .
modifying an AUX reason code name
modifying generic string values . . .
multi-user mode
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 383
. . . . . . . . 514
. . . . . . . . 539
. . . . . . . . 542
. . . . . . . . 487
. . . . . . . . 349
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 461
. 94
. 59
. 80
. 87
. 116
. . . . . . . . 431
N
Name Format Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
O
Options
Default ACD . . . .
First Day of Week . .
general. . . . . . .
report colors . . . .
threshold colors . .
time synchronization
Options...
Communications Tab
Name Format Tab .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
38
38
38
40
43
38
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 46
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
P
password
aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
passwords
choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
permissions
ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Main Menu Addition Access, assigning/modifying . 386
Main Menu Addition Access, listing all . . . . . . 385
Main Menu Addition Access, viewing . . . . . . . 383
split/skill, adding user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
split/skill, deleting user . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
split/skill, listing all user . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
split/skill, modifying user . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
split/skill, viewing user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
trunk group, adding user . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
trunk group, deleting user . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Administration
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
403
404
401
368
374
371
379
372
381
369
378
419
426
423
424
421
409
416
413
414
. 411
482
. . . . . . . . 185
. . . . . . . . 184
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
534
538
535
537
184
. . . . . . . . 470
. . . . . . . . 464
. . . . . . . . 466
. . . . . . . . 468
. . . . . . . . 467
R
recovery kit. . . . . . . .
report colors . . . . . . .
Report Designer . . . . .
reports
ACD Administration Log
choosing . . . . . . .
colors . . . . . . . . .
configuring . . . . . .
custom . . . . . . . .
data collection . . . . .
Dictionary . . . . . . .
Dictionary, printing. . .
exceptions, agent . . .
exceptions, trunk group
. . . . . . . . . . . . 520
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
. . . . . . . . . . . . 179
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
July 2007
566
181
. 43
179
179
346
173
174
299
322
631
Index
generating . . . . . .
malicious call trace . .
members, trunk group .
print setup, changing .
printing . . . . . . . .
restarting . . . . . . .
running. . . . . . . .
split members, running
split/skill, exceptions .
standard . . . . . . .
to summarize . . . . .
types of . . . . . . .
VDN, exceptions . . .
vector, exceptions . .
Reports input window . .
reports saved as HTML .
restarting a report . . . .
restore
automatic . . . . . .
manual . . . . . . . .
restoring data . . . . . .
running a report . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 183
. 349
. 264
. 185
. 184
. 186
. 182
. 224
. 311
. 179
. 181
. 180
. 333
. 343
. 184
. 194
. 186
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 522
. 524
. 539
. 182
S
Save As HTML window . . . . . .
Save as Script - Action window . .
script
creating automatic . . . . . .
creating to run reports . . . . .
exporting report output . . . .
to export report data as HTML .
scripting
non-report actions . . . . . .
scripting an action . . . . . . . .
scripting an input window . . . . .
scripts
organizing . . . . . . . . . .
server . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
service level
increment . . . . . . . . . .
increments . . . . . . . . . .
settings
ACD, listing all . . . . . . . .
ACD, viewing . . . . . . . . .
setup
ACD/switch. . . . . . . . . .
shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . .
copying . . . . . . . . . . .
copying tasks in . . . . . . .
creating . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . . . . . .
description, modifying . . . . .
overview . . . . . . . . . . .
running. . . . . . . . . . . .
632
Administration
. . . . . . . . . 194
. . . . . . . . . 197
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 192
. 188
. 193
. 194
. . . . . . . . . 195
. . . . . . . . . 197
. . . . . . . . . 196
. . . . . . . . . 199
. . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . 253
. . . . . . . . . 271
. . . . . . . . . 484
. . . . . . . . . 483
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 482
. 579
. 608
. 609
. 603
. 613
. 607
. 602
. 606
tasks, adding . . . . . . . . . .
tasks, deleting . . . . . . . . . .
tasks, modifying . . . . . . . . .
single-user mode
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
skills
multi-agent, changing . . . . . .
multiple agents, changing . . . .
VDN, configuring preferences . .
Solaris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
changing user passwords . . . .
local login . . . . . . . . . . . .
printer commands . . . . . . . .
remote login. . . . . . . . . . .
split
extension assignments, changing
extensions, moving . . . . . . .
members report, running . . . . .
split/skill
call profile, deleting . . . . . . .
call profile, modifying . . . . . .
call profile, viewing . . . . . . .
call profiles . . . . . . . . . . .
call profiles, adding . . . . . . .
exceptions . . . . . . . . . . .
exceptions, adding . . . . . . .
exceptions, defintion . . . . . . .
exceptions, deleting . . . . . . .
exceptions, modifying . . . . . .
exceptions, report . . . . . . . .
string values . . . . . . . . . .
user permissions, adding . . . .
user permissions, deleting . . . .
user permissions, listing all . . . .
user permissions, modifying . . .
user permissions, viewing . . . .
split/skill name
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . .
viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill names . . . . . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . . . . . . . .
split/skill string value
field descriptions . . . . . . . .
split/skill string values
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . .
viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
standard database item
viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
standard database items . . . . . .
viewing alphabetically . . . . . .
state
changing, CMS . . . . . . . . .
storage intervals . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 605
. . . . . . . 612
. . . . . . . . 611
. . . . . . . 431
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
216
215
247
571
575
572
576
571
. . . . . . . 219
. . . . . . . 222
. . . . . . . 224
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
258
256
255
252
253
302
303
310
308
306
. 311
136
389
396
393
394
391
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
143
147
146
144
141
145
. . . . . . . 140
. . . . . . . 138
. . . . . . . 137
. . . . . . . 149
. . . . . . . 148
. . . . . . . 150
. . . . . . . 431
. . . . . . . 472
July 2007
Index
viewing. . . . . . . . . . .
string values
generic, modifying . . . . .
generic, viewing . . . . . .
summarizing
data, modifying . . . . . . .
Sun Microsystems, [Link]
interface to CentreVu CMS
switch
settings, listing all . . . . . .
settings, viewing . . . . . .
setup . . . . . . . . . . .
synchronize
time zone . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 473
. . . . . . . . . . 116
. . . . . . . . . . 115
. . . . . . . . . . 479
. . . . . . . . . . 27
. . . . . . . . . . 484
. . . . . . . . . . 483
. . . . . . . . . . 482
. . . . . . . . . . 476
T
tape drives and cartridges . . . . .
tasks
timetable, adding . . . . . . . .
timetable, modifying. . . . . . .
threshold colors . . . . . . . . . .
time
synchronization, master ACD . .
time synchronization . . . . . . . .
time zone
offset, ACD . . . . . . . . . . .
timetable
tasks, adding . . . . . . . . . .
timetables . . . . . . . . . . . . .
backups . . . . . . . . . . . .
changing . . . . . . . . . . . .
copying . . . . . . . . . . . .
creating . . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . .
global edits . . . . . . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . . . . . . . .
overview . . . . . . . . . . . .
prerequisites . . . . . . . . . .
scheduling . . . . . . . . . . .
tasks, adding . . . . . . . . . .
tasks, copying . . . . . . . . .
tasks, deleting . . . . . . . . .
tasks, global edits. . . . . . . .
tasks, modifying . . . . . . . .
timezone
adjustment, ACD . . . . . . . .
trace
agent, listing all records . . . . .
trunk group
assignment, viewing a single . .
assignment, viewing by VDN/split
assignments . . . . . . . . . .
exceptions . . . . . . . . . . .
exceptions, adding . . . . . . .
Administration
. . . . . . . . 510
. . . . . 579, 585
. . . . . . . . 591
. . . . . . . . 43
. . . . . . . . 432
. . . . . . . . 38
. . . . . . . . 476
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 579
. 579
. 580
. 580
. 588
579, 581
. . . 600
. . . 593
. . . 587
. . . 579
. . . 580
. . . 581
. . . 585
. . . 589
. . . 598
. . . 595
. . . 591
. . . . . . . . 472
. . . . . . . . 206
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 262
. 263
. 259
. 314
. 315
exceptions, deleting . . . .
exceptions, modifying . . .
exceptions, report . . . . .
members report . . . . . .
members report, running . .
user permissions, adding .
user permissions, deleting .
user permissions, listing all .
user permissions, modifying
user permissions, viewing .
trunk group assignments
viewing all . . . . . . . .
trunk group name
adding . . . . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . . . . .
modifying . . . . . . . . .
trunk group names . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . . . . .
trunk string values . . . . . .
field descriptions . . . . .
modifying . . . . . . . . .
viewing . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
319
317
322
264
265
399
406
403
404
401
. . . . . . . . . . 260
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
152
156
153
155
151
154
157
159
158
158
users
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Menu Addition Access, assigning/modifying
Main Menu Addition Access, listing all . . . . .
Main Menu Addition Access, viewing . . . . . .
permissions, ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, adding ACD . . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, adding split/skill. . . . . . . . . .
permissions, adding trunk group . . . . . . . .
permissions, adding VDN . . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, adding vector . . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, deleting ACD . . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, deleting split/skill . . . . . . . . .
permissions, deleting trunk group . . . . . . . .
permissions, deleting VDN . . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, deleting vector . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, listing all ACD . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, listing all Feature Access . . . . .
permissions, listing all split/skill . . . . . . . . .
permissions, listing all trunk group . . . . . . .
permissions, listing all VDN . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, listing all vector . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, modifying ACD . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, modifying Feature Access . . . . .
permissions, modifying split/skill . . . . . . . .
permissions, modifying trunk group . . . . . . .
permissions, modifying VDN . . . . . . . . . .
permissions, modifying vector . . . . . . . . .
357
364
386
385
383
367
368
389
399
419
409
374
396
406
426
416
371
379
393
403
423
413
372
381
394
404
424
414
July 2007
633
Index
permissions, viewing ACD . . . . . .
permissions, viewing Feature Access
permissions, viewing split/skill . . . .
permissions, viewing trunk group . .
permissions, viewing VDN . . . . . .
permissions, viewing vector . . . . .
settings, modifying . . . . . . . . .
settings, viewing . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 369
. 378
. 391
. 401
. 421
. 411
. 362
. 360
V
VDN
call profile, adding . . . . .
call profile, deleting . . . . .
call profile, modifying . . . .
call profile, viewing . . . . .
call profiles . . . . . . . . .
exceptions, adding . . . . .
exceptions, deleting . . . . .
exceptions, modifying . . . .
exceptions, report . . . . . .
skill preferences . . . . . .
skill preferences, changing .
skill preferences, configuring
skill preferences, listing all . .
skill preferences, viewing . .
user permissions, adding . .
user permissions, deleting . .
user permissions, listing all .
user permissions, modifying .
user permissions, viewing . .
VDN name
adding . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . . . . . .
modifying . . . . . . . . .
viewing. . . . . . . . . . .
VDN names . . . . . . . . . .
VDN-to-vector assignments. . .
modifying . . . . . . . . .
viewing all . . . . . . . . .
viewing by vector . . . . . .
vector
configuration report . . . . .
configuration report, running .
exceptions . . . . . . . . .
exceptions, adding . . . . .
exceptions, deleting . . . . .
exceptions, modifying . . . .
exceptions, report . . . . . .
user permissions, adding . .
user permissions, deleting . .
user permissions, listing all .
user permissions, modifying .
user permissions, viewing . .
634
Administration
vector name
adding . . . . . . . . . . . .
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . .
listing all . . . . . . . . . . .
modifying . . . . . . . . . . .
viewing . . . . . . . . . . . .
vector names . . . . . . . . . . .
viewing an AUX reason code name
viewing generic string values . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
168
172
170
171
169
167
. 84
. 115
W
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 272
. 277
. 275
. 274
. 271
. 326
. 330
. 328
. 333
. 247
. 248
. 247
. 251
. 249
. 419
. 426
. 423
. 424
. 421
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 162
. 166
. 164
. 165
. 163
. 160
. 266
. 269
. 267
. 268
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 278
. 279
. 336
. 337
. 341
. 339
. 343
. 409
. 416
. 413
. 414
. 411
week
beginning of .
end of . . .
work day
start time . .
stop time . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
July 2007